(back_comment): Use one switch rather than a few `if's.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
404fa7d6
DL
1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
2Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
1fa28578
GM
11** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
12the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
13
14** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
15images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
16to list them.
6344985d 17
d5483ab1
GM
18** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
19Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if they these are available.
1fa28578
GM
20\f
21* Changes in Emacs 21.1
22
d76c03ea
GM
23** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
24Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
25will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
26character is still bound as before.
27
3b4fa1b2
DL
28** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
29using that menu.
30
40e857ea
DL
31** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
32suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to executable-chmod.
33
c08398de
DL
34** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
35buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
36contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
37by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
38insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
39the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
40Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
41
0b8a3a6d
DL
42** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
43environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
44
45** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
46point in a pop-up window.
47
48** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
49displays all characters in that character set.
50
51** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
52coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
53
5cb6a58e
SM
54** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
55on the context.
56
a1b8d58b
GM
57** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
58
6e417ca5
DL
59** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
60been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
61
5898e075
DL
62** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
63`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
64indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
65indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
66
abfcc168
GM
67** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
68sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 69(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
70You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
71
cc181e95
GM
72** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
73on the display using several methods
74
75- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
76a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
77be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
78
79- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
80equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
81
da4496b6 82- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
83
84- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
85the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
86
3b4fa1b2 87** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 88an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 89command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 90does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 91
176256a1 92** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
93`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
94typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 95
dd0add8e
DL
96** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
97characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
98
699238d9
GM
99** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
100compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
101this behavior.
102
103The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
104compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
105Emacs dump core.
106
107** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 108
7233c5bd
GM
109*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
110whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
111is useful for debugging X problems.
112
113Example:
114
699238d9 115 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 116
100b3cbb
GM
117*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
118visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
119the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
120and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
121visual class names are
122
123 TrueColor
124 PseudoColor
125 DirectColor
126 StaticColor
127 GrayScale
128 StaticGray
129
130Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
131`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
132meaning.
133
134The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
135supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
136`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
137visual.
138
139Example:
140
699238d9 141 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
142
143*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
144specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
145default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
146resource values are `true' or `on'.
147
148Example:
149
699238d9 150 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 151
0d0c76b8
EZ
152** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
153more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
154now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
155
42088c12 156** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 157display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
158shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
159be customized.
c60ea02e 160
31047e0d
DL
161** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
162
b02786f9
GM
163** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
164all frames except the selected one.
165
3261c1d8
DL
166** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
167to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
168
ffe36136
GM
169** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
170the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo
171area or with tooltips.
172
559cee90
DL
173** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
174read mail from the menu etc.
175
271b4185
GM
176** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
177a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
178
0daee095
GM
179** Changes in Texinfo mode.
180
181** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
182macros
183
184 Key binding Macro
185 -------------------------
186 C-c C-c C-s @strong
187 C-c C-c C-e @emph
188 C-c C-c u @url
189 C-c C-c q @quotation
190 C-c C-c m @email
191
559cee90
DL
192** Changes in Outline mode.
193
194There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
195`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
196the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
197
404fa7d6
DL
198** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
199groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
200
8964fec7
SM
201** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
202or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
203several other special buffers.
204
39783d73
WP
205** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
206under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
207.emacs file.
208
209The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
210determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
211
d35fce81
GM
212** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
213abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
214`directory-abbrev-alist'.
215
df5a1902
GM
216** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
217is running in batch mode. For example,
218
219 (message "%s" (read t))
220
221will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
222to standard output.
223
a933dad1
DL
224** Faces and frame parameters.
225
226There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
227Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
228`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
229`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
230sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
231for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
232parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
233
234Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
235`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 236`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
237`default' face and vice versa.
238
f77a4a8a
GM
239** New face `menu'.
240
241The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
242Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
243attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
244
a933dad1
DL
245** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
246
247The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
248colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
249correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
250the screen gamma of a frame's display.
251
252PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
253in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
254color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
255
256The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
257`ScreenGamma'.
258
259** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
260
261The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
262Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
263oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
264of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
265the text.
266
267** Emacs has a new face implementation.
268
269The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
270font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
271height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
272These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
273specify a font.
274
275Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
276These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
277under Lisp changes, below.
278
279** New default font is Courier 12pt.
280
281** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
282its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
283it is hollow.
284
285** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
286truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
287foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
288customizing face `fringe'.
289
290** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
291can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
292
293** LessTif support.
294
295Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
296need a version 0.88.1 or later.
297
298** Toolkit scroll bars.
299
300Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
301LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
302configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
303bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
304bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
305Emacs.
306
307When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
308Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
309Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
310Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
311define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
312`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
313
314Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
315a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
316directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
317different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
318system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
319add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
320
321The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
322`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
323This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
324image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
325Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
326
327** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
328
329When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
330widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
331Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
332
333** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
334
335When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
336whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
337defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
338highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
339displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
340whitespace.
341
342** Busy-cursor.
343
344Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
345display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
346
347** Blinking cursor
348
349M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
350terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
351and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
352the group `cursor'.
353
354** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
355
356This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
357generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
358See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
359details.
360
361Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
362have to do anything to activate it.
363
364** Tabs and variable-width text.
365
366Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
367defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
368independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
369Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
370
371** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
372
373*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
374
375 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
376
79dd1637
RS
377The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
378LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 379
79dd1637
RS
380*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
381LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1
DL
382
383** Hscrolling in C code.
384
cc181e95
GM
385Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
386`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
387customized.
a933dad1
DL
388
389** Tool bar support.
390
391Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
392how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
393
394** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
395
396Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
397mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
398line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
399about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
400in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
401
402Currently, the following actions have been defined:
403
404- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
405buffers.
406
407- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
408M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
409
410- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
411
559cee90 412- Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
a933dad1
DL
413toggles the read-only status.
414
415- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
416
417** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
418
419When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 420from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
421non-nil.
422
423** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
424
425Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
426Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
427the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
428italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
429Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
430attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
431on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
432
433** Sound support
434
2f516940 435Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 436driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 437supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1
DL
438
439** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
440the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
441forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
442value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
443users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
444even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
445
446The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
447
448** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
449
450As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
451drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
452`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
453
454** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
455bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
456
457This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
458`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
459variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
460
461** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
462
463When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
464value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
465number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
466fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
467
468When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
469value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
470number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
471fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
472
473** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
474notably at the end of lines.
475
476All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
477spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
478
eee54b0e
DL
479There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
480
a933dad1
DL
481** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
482query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
483after each match to get the replacement text.
484
d5483ab1
GM
485** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
486you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0
GM
487
488** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', let's
489you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
490lisp-complete-symbol.
491
a933dad1
DL
492** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
493
163ea954
RS
494If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
495longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
496it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
497window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
498
499- User option: max-mini-window-height
500
501Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
502fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
503specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
504
505Default is 0.25.
506
2f72fd2f
GM
507** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
508
0d43b60d
GM
509** Changes to hideshow.el
510
511Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
512selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
513
514*** Generalized block selection and traversal
515
516A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
517(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
518which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
519`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
520point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
521(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
522
523If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
524i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
525backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
526the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
527
528*** Isearch support for updating mode line
529
530During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
531blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
532line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
533portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
534is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
535
536To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
537something like this in your .emacs.
538
539 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
540 (lambda ()
541 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
542
559cee90
DL
543** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
544
545If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
546entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
547log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
548
549New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
550buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
eb2aac9d
GM
551
552Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
553if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
554
555The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
556expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
557cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
558a file.
559
3476b54a
GM
560** Changes in Font Lock
561
562*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
563font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
564mode.
565
b3b98592
GM
566** Comint (subshell) changes
567
568Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
569and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
570
571The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
572buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
573buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
574
575The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
576M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
577the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
578
e26cec67
GM
579** Changes to Rmail mode
580
c0510d27
GM
581*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
582set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
583receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
584recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
585`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
586as correspondent.
587
588Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
589mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 590regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 591
3b55acc9
GM
592*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
593to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
594Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
595with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
596for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
597
6a1950ec
GM
598*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
599like `j'.
600
5bb6f079
RS
601*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
602specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 603digest message.
e26cec67 604
993d8b7d
DL
605*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
606in which folder to put messages automatically.
607
400a1ed0
GM
608** Changes to TeX mode
609
610The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
611`latex-mode'.
612
a933dad1
DL
613** Changes to RefTeX mode
614
615*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
616 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
617 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
618 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
619 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
620 can be edited from that buffer.
621
622*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
623 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
624 `A' to use all marked entries).
625
626*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
627 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
628
629*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
630 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
631 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
632 been cited.
633
38de9631
GM
634** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
635The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
636semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
637in column 1 are always made leaves.
638
a933dad1
DL
639** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
640has the following new features:
641
642*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
643may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
644to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
645time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
646
647*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
648feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
649file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
650compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
651pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
652defaults to 1.
653
b675095c
GM
654** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
655file names.
656
a933dad1
DL
657** Tooltips.
658
659Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
660mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
661can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
662
663Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
664variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
665the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
666tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
667
668** Customize changes
669
670*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
671`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
672cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
673
674*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
675Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
676default).
677
0ae51efb
GM
678*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
679between custom options. Example:
680
681 (defcustom default-input-method nil
682 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
683 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
684 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
685 :group 'mule
686 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
687 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
688
689This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
690current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
691first in a custom-set-variables statement.
692
a933dad1
DL
693** New features in evaluation commands
694
5e03eb84 695*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
696modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
697print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
698customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
699eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
700
5e03eb84
GM
701*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
702code when called with a prefix argument.
703
a933dad1
DL
704** Dired changes
705
706*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
707command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
708is, delete only empty directories.
709
710*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
711command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
712copy directories recursively.
713
f6737cde
GM
714*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
715in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
716the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
717
2f72fd2f
GM
718*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
719replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
720directory.
721
a933dad1
DL
722** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
723use the -f option when sending mail.
724
b1c609b1
GM
725** CC mode changes.
726
727Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
728current user setups (although it's believed that these
729incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
730However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
731back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
732compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
733release.
734
735*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
736When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
737variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
738take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
739is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
740settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
741possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
742Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
743
744By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
745special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
746the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
747of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
748above.
749
750Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
751when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
752function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
753call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
754then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
755values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
756only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
757function documentation for more info.
758
759The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
760especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
761with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
762intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
763such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
764is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
765configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
766global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
767
768(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
769
770**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
771This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
772
773This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
774variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
775completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
776the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
777empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
778style system.
779
780**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
781In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
782c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
783as far as possible.
784
785*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
786CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
787surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
788chapter about this in the manual.
789
790**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
791The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
792recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
793primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
794adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
795
796**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
797This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
798c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
799
800**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
801This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
802
803It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
804Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
805A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
806inside CC Mode.
807
808Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
809causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
810the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
811available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
812cc-mode/).
813
814**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
815The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
816specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
817literals.
818
819**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
820It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
821prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
822you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
823this function.
824
825*** Fixes to IDL mode.
826It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
827to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
828struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
829Thanks to Eric Eide.
830
831*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
832It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
833opening braces hangs and when they don't.
834
835**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
836
837*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
838See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
839better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
840and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
841
842*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
843previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
844the column specified by comment-column.
845
846*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
847In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
848is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
849prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
850contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
851don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
852
853*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
854instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
855arguments.
856
857*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
858
859*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
860c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
861c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
862variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
863Provan).
864
865*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
866
c407c570
GM
867** Makefile mode changes
868
869*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
870
871*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
872Fontlock mode is active.
873
87be76f6
GM
874** Isearch changes
875
c407c570
GM
876** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
877respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
878that started the search.
879
87be76f6 880*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
881selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
882
87be76f6
GM
883*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
884
d35fce81 885Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
886`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
887search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
888before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
889highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
890`secondary-selection'.
891
892The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
893will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
894Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
895using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
896usual snappy response.
897
898If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
899matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
900set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
901isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
902
35384f06
GM
903** Changes in sort.el
904
905The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 906as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
907new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
908numeric base.
87be76f6 909
d7b511c4
GM
910** Changes to Ange-ftp
911
912*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
913names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
914sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
915
d7b511c4
GM
916*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
917ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
918
4b9347b3
GM
919** Shell script mode changes.
920
921Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
922derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
923sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
924
79214ddf
FP
925** Etags changes.
926
927*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
928
aca0be23 929*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
930possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
931{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
932This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
933a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 934
79214ddf
FP
935*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
936declarations when given the --declarations option.
937
938*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 939"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
940
941*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
942types.
943
de370c4c 944*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
945
946*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
947
948*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
949are now tagged.
950
951*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
952variables are tagged.
953
954*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
955
8dc78b52
FP
956*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
957for PSWrap.
79214ddf 958
f6737cde
GM
959** Changes in etags.el
960
3f6e4b8b
GM
961*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
962tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
963is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
964
f6737cde
GM
965*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
966the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
967
968If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
969FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
970TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
971obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
972
973TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
974
975FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
976List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
977
978A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
979
980 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
981 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
982 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
983
984*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
985of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
986
987*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
988names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
989
fbc164de
PE
990** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
991and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
992LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
993
0b8a3a6d
DL
994** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
995Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
9968859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
997There is currently no specific input method support for them.
59c1bf85 998
163ea954 999** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1000remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1001appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1002
1003** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1004
6f8ea2ae
DL
1005** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1006
c0510d27
GM
1007** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
1008containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1009expression from that list, are not checked.
1010
a933dad1
DL
1011** New modes and packages
1012
5cb6a58e
SM
1013*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1014package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1015be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1016
578979ee
GM
1017*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1018facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1019separate Texinfo file.
1020
dc1178bf
SM
1021*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine
1022or by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1023provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS.
1024It comes with log-view-mode to view RCS and SCCS logs and log-edit-mode
1025used to enter checkin log messages.
1026
6abca616
EZ
1027*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1028without invoking external programs.
1029
1030The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1031and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1032`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1033is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1034Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1035
1036The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1037page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1038
5e5dff44
GM
1039*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1040authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1041
1042The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1043the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1044the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1045Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1046even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1047single step.
1048
1049On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1050matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1051probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1052contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1053
f7136ee8
GM
1054*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1055unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1056actually modifying content of a buffer.
1057
bbd9b566
GM
1058*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1059PostScript.
1060
1061Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1062
1063The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1064
1065 ; comment (until end of line)
1066 A non-terminal
1067 "C" terminal
1068 ?C? special
1069 $A default non-terminal
1070 $"C" default terminal
1071 $?C? default special
1072 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1073 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1074 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1075 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1076 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1077 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1078 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1079 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1080 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1081 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1082 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1083 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1084 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1085 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1086 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1087
1088Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1089
99453a38
GM
1090*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1091align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1092determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1093example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1094equal signs of assignments.
1095
559cee90
DL
1096*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1097paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1098
6448a6b3
GM
1099*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1100list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1101buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1102customize the package.
1103
6344985d
GM
1104*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1105
249652b1
GM
1106*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1107replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1108is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1109and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1110not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1111which answers different needs.
1112
3476b54a
GM
1113*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1114suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1115expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1116course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1117reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1118to be enabled.
1119
8964fec7
SM
1120*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1121containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1122
a933dad1
DL
1123*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1124
1125*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1126
1127*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1128
1129*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1130Pascal) language.
1131
1132*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1133the text at point.
1134
1135*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1136
8d54eb69
DL
1137*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1138
a933dad1
DL
1139*** whitespace.el ???
1140
ebcfda83
GM
1141*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1142files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1143(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1144interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1145often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1146uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1147codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1148
1149*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1150
1151Here is an example of columns:
1152
1153horse apple bus
1154dog pineapple car EXTRA
1155porcupine strawberry airplane
1156
1157Doing the following settings:
1158
1159 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1160 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1161 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1162 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1163
1164
1165Selecting the lines above and typing:
1166
1167 M-x delimit-columns-region
1168
1169It results:
1170
1171[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1172[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1173[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1174
1175delim-col has the following options:
1176
1177 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1178 before all columns.
1179
1180 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1181 between each column.
1182
1183 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1184 after all columns.
1185
1186 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1187 each column.
1188
1189delim-col has the following commands:
1190
1191 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1192 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1193
f507826c
GM
1194*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
1195were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu
1196is displayed in the "Files" menu.
1197
1198The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions.
1199
1200To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode.
1201
1202To enable recentf at Emacs startup use
1203M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET.
1204
1205To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use
1206M-x customize-group RET recentf RET.
1207
8062f458
DL
1208*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1209text.
1210
36e24b82 1211*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1212of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1213specific to Message mode.
1214
36e24b82
DL
1215*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1216viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1217with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1218
aaa659ef
DL
1219*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1220interface to access directory servers using different directory
1221protocols. It has a separate manual.
1222
eee54b0e
DL
1223*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1224for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1225
612839b6
GM
1226*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1227
1228*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
1229minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1230
399da7e3
DL
1231*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1232with the diary features.
1233
6e417ca5
DL
1234*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1235numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1236
4a27bdfb
GM
1237*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1238Fill mode.
1239
a933dad1
DL
1240** Withdrawn packages
1241
1242*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1243functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1244
3261c1d8
DL
1245*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1246
1247*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1248
1249\f
1250* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1251(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1252
f98d3086
SM
1253** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1254It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1255is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1256
87efd256
GM
1257** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1258
1259- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1260
1261Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1262MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1263
67c9a1d2
GM
1264** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1265
1266- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1267
1268Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1269
1270This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1271calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1272argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1273value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1274returned.
1275
1276Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1277if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1278it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1279minibuffer even if it is active.
1280
1281Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1282counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1283too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1284and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1285`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1286entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1287
1288ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1289ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1290ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1291ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1292ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1293If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1294Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1295
dce6b995 1296** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key
f98d3086 1297and event names in angle brackets.
dce6b995 1298
25fa6deb
GM
1299** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1300call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
1301message; it will be truncated instead.
1302
3b4fa1b2 1303** The user option line-number-display-limit can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1304meaning no limit.
1305
c08398de
DL
1306** select-safe-coding-system now also checks the most preferred
1307coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1308DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1309
80c05bd3 1310** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1311of a primitive.
1312
80c05bd3
DL
1313** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1314buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1315This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1316than replacing the local map.
1317
4bc7a543
DL
1318** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1319after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1320
1321** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1322
a933dad1
DL
1323\f
1324* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1325
1326Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1327--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1328When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1329so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1330
0b8a3a6d
DL
1331*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1332`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1333when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1334multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1335
1336*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1337`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1338contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1339
1340*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1341changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1342[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1343regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1344the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1345extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1346bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1347eight-bit-graphic.
1348
1349** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1350
1351A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1352a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1353character set as previously.
1354
1355*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1356They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1357modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1358
1359CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1360characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1361range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1362case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1363
1364FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1365name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1366
1367*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1368registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1369"fontset-default".
1370
1371*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1372argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1373
1374** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1375composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1376buffers and strings.
1377
1378*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1379character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1380code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1381have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1382composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1383composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1384The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1385also been deleted.
1386
1387*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1388specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1389`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1390
1391*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1392MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1393composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1394may differ between buffer and string text.
1395
1396*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1397COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1398
1399*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1400directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1401Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1402`composition' from STRING.
1403
1404*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1405a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1406
1407*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1408obsolete.
1409
1410** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1411Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1412character set is not used.
1413
1414** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1415`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1416X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1417
1418+++
1419** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1420are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 14210xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 1422
399da7e3 1423+++
f0124b4a
DL
1424** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1425that offset in the file before writing.
1426
3bbc50af
DL
1427** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1428promised long ago.
1429
f98d3086
SM
1430** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
1431compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 1432
612839b6
GM
1433** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1434`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1435from which the command was issued.
1436
1437** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1438`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1439`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1440additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1441operate on.
1442
271b4185
GM
1443** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1444to `window-buffer-height'.
1445
1446- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1447
1448Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1449The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1450lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1451
1452Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1453respectively.
1454
1455If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1456COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1457
1458The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1459obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1460on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1461
1462Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1463buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1464possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1465is currently displayed in some window.
1466
3c30cb6e
DL
1467** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1468argument function's results.
1469
62f20204
GM
1470** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1471signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1472
c0510d27
GM
1473** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1474header is the list of headers passed to it.
1475
1476** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1477ignores differences in case and text representation.
1478
1479** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1480cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1481as follows:
1482
1483 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1484 nil don't display a cursor
1485 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1486 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1487 others display a box cursor.
1488
9a0dd3dc
GM
1489** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1490an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1491defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1492set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1493
d7b511c4 1494** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1495specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1496the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1497text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1498
1499Example:
1500
1501 (string-to-syntax "()")
1502 => (4 . 41)
1503
1fa28578
GM
1504** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1505other than 10.
1506
1507*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1508INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1509
1510 #b1111
1511 => 15
1512 #b-1111
1513 => -15
1514
1515*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1516
1517 #o666
1518 => 438
1519
1520*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1521
1522 #xbeef
1523 => 48815
1524
1525*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1526
1527 #2R-111
1528 => -7
1529 #25rah
1530 => 267
1531
3d4ff2dd 1532** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 1533the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
1534and isn't a string.
1535
3d4ff2dd
GM
1536** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1537a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1538value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1539not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1540
16ce590d
DL
1541+++
1542** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1543
73825616 1544** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1545for a regexp in a string.
1546
1547** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1548`mouse-position-function'.
1549
723e779c
GM
1550** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1551that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1552
d1e103b2
GM
1553** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1554Keywords are now always considered constants.
1555
31047e0d
DL
1556+++
1557** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1558returns it.
1559
7a85e4df
GM
1560** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1561returned by function `recent-keys'.
1562
02b14400
RS
1563+++
1564** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1565can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1566Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1567etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1568mode.
404fa7d6 1569
02b14400 1570+++
8964fec7
SM
1571** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1572and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1573
02b14400
RS
1574+++
1575** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1576has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1577function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1578returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1579been performed."
1580
1581When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1582and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1583hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1584then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1585
02b14400 1586+++
81da8b32
GM
1587** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1588In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1589and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1590
02b14400 1591+++
9e207b90
GM
1592** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1593with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1594specified table.
1595
1596 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1597
1598Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1599TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1600saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1601what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1602
02b14400 1603+++
d7f89643 1604** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1605Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1606
02b14400 1607+++
dde9e75a
GM
1608** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1609removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1610
02b14400 1611+++
9da30515
GM
1612** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1613instead of being optional.
1614
02b14400 1615+++
d20679eb
GM
1616** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1617modify read-only text.
1618
02b14400 1619+++
fbc164de
PE
1620** New functions and variables for locales.
1621
1622The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1623decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1624time functions like strftime. The new variables
1625`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1626locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1627
1628The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1629environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1630the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1631environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1632not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1633`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1634`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1635
02b14400 1636+++
863476d1
SM
1637** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1638To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1639modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1640start sequences.
1641
02b14400 1642+++
ef6d912c
GM
1643** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1644because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1645
02b14400 1646+++
a933dad1
DL
1647** New function `propertize'
1648
1649The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1650strings with text properties.
1651
1652- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1653
1654Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1655by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1656PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1657specified value of that property. Example:
1658
1659 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1660
1661+++
1662** push and pop macros.
1663
02b14400
RS
1664Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1665are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1666as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1667
1668(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1669(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1670 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1671
02b14400
RS
1672** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1673
6c7fd5aa
RS
1674Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1675are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1676
1677(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1678 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1679 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1680 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1681
1682(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1683 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1684 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1685 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1686
a933dad1
DL
1687+++
1688** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1689as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1690
1691[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1692[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1693[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1694[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1695[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1696 space, and DEL.
1697[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1698 and DEL.
1699[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1700 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1701 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1702[:alpha:] matches letters.
1703 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1704 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1705[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1706[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1707[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1708[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1709 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1710 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1711[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1712[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1713[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1714
1715+++
1716** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1717
1718The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1719
1720- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1721
1722The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1723are optional. The following arguments are defined:
1724
1725:test TEST
1726
1727TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
1728Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
1729it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
1730
1731:size SIZE
1732
1733SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
1734many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
1735
1736:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
1737
1738REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
1739full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
1740size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
17411.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
1742old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
1743
1744:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
1745
1746THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
1747hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
1748(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
1749
1750:weakness WEAK
1751
1752WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
1753Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
1754their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
1755hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
1756
1757- Function: makehash &optional TEST
1758
1759Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
1760
1761- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
1762
1763Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
1764
1765- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
1766
1767Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
1768values are shared.
1769
1770- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
1771
1772Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
1773
1774- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1775
1776Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
1777
1778- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
1779
1780Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
1781
1782- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1783
1784Returns the size of TABLE.
1785
1786- Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
1787
1788Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
1789
1790- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
1791
1792Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
1793
1794- Function: clrhash TABLE
1795
1796Clear TABLE.
1797
1798- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
1799
1800Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
1801not found.
1802
79214ddf 1803- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
1804
1805Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
1806another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
1807
1808- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
1809
1810Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
1811
1812- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
1813
1814Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
1815arguments KEY and VALUE.
1816
1817- Function: sxhash OBJ
1818
1819Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
1820
1821- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
1822
1823Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
1824a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 1825comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
1826and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
1827of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
1828
1829TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
1830
1831HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
1832code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
1833integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
1834
1835Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
1836be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
1837
1838 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
1839 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
1840
1841 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
1842 (sxhash (upcase a)))
1843
79214ddf 1844 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
1845 'case-fold-string-hash))
1846
1847 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
1848
1849+++
1850** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
1851
1852It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
1853circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
1854a cons cell which is its own cdr.
1855
1856+++
1857** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
1858
1859If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
1860#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
1861
a933dad1
DL
1862+++
1863** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
1864t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
1865specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
1866is too short to reach that column.
1867
1868+++
1869** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
1870now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
1871after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
1872two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
1873
1874If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
1875perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
1876and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
1877
1878+++
1879** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
1880to specify which buffer to return the size of.
1881
1882+++
1883** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
1884calendar-move-hook after moving point.
1885
1886+++
1887** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
1888directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
1889small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
1890small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
1891temporary-file-directory instead.
1892
1893+++
1894** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
1895the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
1896`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
1897hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
1898
1899+++
1900** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
1901elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
1902
1903+++
1904** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
1905
1906make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
1907creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
1908ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
1909
1910+++
1911** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
1912
1913The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
1914on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
1915is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
1916never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
1917ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
1918overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
1919
1920If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
1921that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
1922to get an error if the file exists at that time.
1923The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
1924
1925+++
1926** Function `format' now handles text properties.
1927
1928Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
1929If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
1930ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
1931result string.
1932
1933Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
1934string where arguments appear in the result string.
1935
1936Example:
1937
1938 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
1939 (s2 "world"))
1940 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
1941 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 1942 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
1943
1944results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
1945
1946+++
1947** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
1948
1949Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
1950The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
1951argument in it.
1952
1953 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
1954 (arg "world"))
1955 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
1956 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
1957 (message msg arg))
1958
1959+++
1960** Sound support
1961
1962Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
1963(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
1964
1965Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
1966(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
1967to enable sound support.
1968
1969Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
1970list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
1971when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
1972functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
1973sound to play, before playing the sound.
1974
1975The following sound properties are supported:
1976
1977- `:file FILE'
1978
1979FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
1980searched relative to `data-directory'.
1981
6fb40beb
GM
1982- `:data DATA'
1983
1984DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
1985may be present, but not both.
1986
a933dad1
DL
1987- `:volume VOLUME'
1988
1989VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
19900..1. This property is optional.
1991
1992Other properties are ignored.
1993
1994** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
1995
1996** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
1997a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
1998
1999** Changes to garbage collection
2000
2001*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2002of live and free strings.
2003
2004*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2005strings that have been consed so far.
2006
a933dad1 2007\f
04545643
GM
2008* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2009Lisp Manual
2010
2c69ced2
GM
2011
2012** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2013image.
2014
2015- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2016
2017Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2018
2019SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2020measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2021character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2022font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2023FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2024
0b8a3a6d
DL
2025** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2026satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2027
2028+++
2029** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2030optional.
2031
04545643
GM
2032** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center'.
2033
2034When this property is specified, the image is vertically centered
2035around a centerline which would be the vertical center of text drawn
2036at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
2037properties and overlays that apply to the image.
2038
2039\f
a933dad1
DL
2040* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2041
2042Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2043--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2044When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2045so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2046
f6d3257b
GM
2047** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2048to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2049
2050Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2051text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2052is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2053your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2054laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2055just display it black instead.
2056
2057This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2058a line like
2059
2060 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2061
2062in your `.emacs'.
2063
a933dad1
DL
2064** New face implementation.
2065
2066Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2067font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2068
2069+++
2070*** New faces.
2071
2072Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2073
2074 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2075
a933dad1
DL
2076 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2077 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2078
a933dad1 2079 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2080
a933dad1 2081 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2082
a933dad1 2083 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2084
a933dad1 2085 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2086
a933dad1
DL
2087 7. Background color.
2088
2089 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2090
2091 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2092
2093 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2094
2095 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2096
2097 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2098 color.
2099
2100 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2101 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2102
2103Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2104same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2105frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2106faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2107with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2108attributes mentioned above.
2109
2110There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2111definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2112created frames.
79214ddf 2113
a933dad1
DL
2114A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2115have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2116`fully-specified'.
2117
2118+++
2119*** Face merging.
2120
2121The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2122combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2123aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2124properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2125that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2126results in a fully-specified face.
2127
2128+++
2129*** Face realization.
2130
2131After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2132merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2133realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2134available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2135face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2136cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2137
2138Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2139character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2140for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2141charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2142
2143Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2144specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2145being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2146the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2147statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2148
2149In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2150`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
21510x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2152the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2153initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2154Emacs.
2155
2156Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2157`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2158registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2159with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2160
2161++++
2162**** Clearing face caches.
2163
2164The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2165on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2166unused fonts.
2167
2168+++
2169*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2170
a933dad1
DL
2171Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2172given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2173for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2174
2175If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2176pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2177family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2178property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2179an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2180
2181Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2182against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2183match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2184
2185Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2186
2187The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2188attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2189face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2190names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2191that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2192width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2193to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2194
2195Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2196specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2197face doesn't exist.
2198
2199+++
2200**** Scalable fonts
2201
2202Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2203since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2204servers.
2205
2206To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2207`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2208scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2209Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2210scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2211that list. Example:
2212
2213 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2214
2215allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2216
2217+++
2218*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2219
2220- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2221
2222Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2223is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2224string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2225
2226If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2227the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2228FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2229POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2230SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2231These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2232if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2233REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2234the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2235of the face font sort order.
2236
79214ddf 2237- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2238
2239Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2240omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2241(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2242non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2243
2244- Variable: font-list-limit
2245
2246Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2247won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2248matching font. The default is currently 100.
2249
2250+++
2251*** Setting face attributes.
2252
2253For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2254with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2255implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2256`face-attribute'.
2257
2258Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2259symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2260
2261The following attributes are recognized:
2262
2263`:family'
2264
2265VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2266or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2267and `?' are allowed.
2268
2269`:width'
2270
2271VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2272It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2273`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2274`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2275
2276`:height'
2277
2278VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
22791/10 pt.
2280
2281`:weight'
2282
2283VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2284symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2285`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2286
2287`:slant'
2288
2289VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2290symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2291`reverse-oblique'.
2292
2293`:foreground', `:background'
2294
2295VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2296
2297`:underline'
2298
2299VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2300VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2301a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2302don't underline.
2303
2304`:overline'
2305
2306VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2307VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2308string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2309overline.
2310
2311`:strike-through'
2312
2313VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2314striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2315face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2316is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2317
2318`:box'
2319
2320VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2321around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2322VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2323of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2324and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2325VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2326:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2327the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2328specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2329defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2330the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2331color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2332should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2333like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2334that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2335the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2336box.
2337
2338`:inverse-video'
2339
2340VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2341inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2342
2343`:stipple'
2344
2345If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2346The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2347searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2348HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2349is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2350explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2351
2352For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2353and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2354
2355`:font'
2356
2357Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2358XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2359is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2360versions of Emacs.
2361
2362For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2363be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2364must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2365
2366Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2367`defface'.
2368
2369*** Face attributes and X resources
2370
2371The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2372from X resources:
2373
2374 Face attribute X resource class
2375-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2376 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2377 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2378 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2379 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2380 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2381 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2382 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2383 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2384 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2385 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2386 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2387 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2388 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2389 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2390 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2391 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2392 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2393 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2394 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2395
2396+++
2397*** Text property `face'.
2398
2399The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2400specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2401specification can be
2402
24031. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2404
24052. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2406 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2407 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2408 for face attribute names.
2409
24103. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2411 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2412 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2413
2414+++
2415** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2416
acf3ecb7
EZ
2417The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2418on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2419the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2420default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2421`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2422used to clear the mapping table.
2423
acf3ecb7
EZ
2424** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2425
2426The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2427and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2428type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2429color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2430display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2431old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2432`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2433compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2434should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2435modify their color-related behavior.
2436
2437The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2438any frame type.
2439
8a5719f0
EZ
2440** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2441
2442The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2443`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2444`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2445`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2446`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2447`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2448display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2449the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2450platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2451
a933dad1
DL
2452+++
2453** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2454
463cac2d 2455This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2456
2457The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2458end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2459Otherwise, it returns zero.
2460
463cac2d
GM
2461** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2462
2463There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2464buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
2465text-property.
2466
9a9dfda8 2467Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2468forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2469to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2470not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2471commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2472boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2473`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2474functions.
463cac2d
GM
2475
2476Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2477a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2478editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2479
9a9dfda8
GM
2480The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2481
2482- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
2483
2484Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
2485A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2486If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2487constrained position if that is is different.
2488
2489If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2490positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2491ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
2492constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
2493as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2494is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
2495fields.
2496
2497If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2498NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2499unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2500C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2501only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2502
2503- Function: erase-field &optional POS
2504
2505Erases the field surrounding POS.
2506A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2507If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2508
2509- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2510
2511Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2512A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2513If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2514If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
2515field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2516
2517- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2518
2519Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2520A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2521If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2522If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
2523then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2524
2525- Function: field-string &optional POS
2526
2527Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2528A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2529If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2530
2531- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2532
2533Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2534A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2535If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2536
a933dad1
DL
2537+++
2538** Image support.
2539
2540Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2541strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2542(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2543replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2544
2545If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2546`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2547AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2548window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2549area.
2550
2551IMAGE is an image specification.
2552
2553*** Image specifications
2554
2555Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2556is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2557specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2558symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2559described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2560
2561The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2562
2563`:ascent ASCENT'
2564
576da55d
GM
2565ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2566If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
2567to use for its ascent.
2568
2569If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2570image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2571
04545643
GM
2572If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
2573centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
2574of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
2575overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
2576
2577`:margin MARGIN'
2578
79214ddf 2579MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2580margin around the image. Default is 0.
2581
2582`:relief RELIEF'
2583
2584RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2585around an image.
2586
2587`:algorithm ALGO'
2588
2589Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2590be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2591supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2592which is intended to display images "disabled."
2593
2594`:heuristic-mask BG'
2595
2596If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2597background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2598determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2599corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2600the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2601be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2602background of the image.
2603
2604`:file FILE'
2605
2606Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2607search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2608building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2609may be present in the image specification.
2610
518df5c4
GM
2611`:data DATA'
2612
2613Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2614supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2615present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2616support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2617
a933dad1
DL
2618*** Supported image types
2619
b246b1f6 2620**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2621
2622XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2623properties supported are
2624
2625`:foreground FG'
2626
2627FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2628is the frame's foreground.
2629
2630`:background FG'
2631
2632BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2633the frame's background color.
2634
2635XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2636case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2637instead of a `:file' property.
2638
2639`:width WIDTH'
2640
2641WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2642
2643`:height HEIGHT'
2644
2645HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2646
2647`:data DATA'
2648
2649DATA must be either
2650
2651 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2652 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2653
2654 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2655
2656 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2657 bitmap.
2658
c76e04a8
GM
2659 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2660 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2661 in the file.
2662
a933dad1
DL
2663**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2664
2665XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2666`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2667found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2668`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2669
2670Additional image properties supported are:
2671
2672`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2673
2674SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2675name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2676name.
2677
2678XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2679add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2680
a933dad1
DL
2681The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2682to display compressed images.
2683
2684**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2685
2686PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2687mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2688defined.
2689
2690**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2691
2692Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2693package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2694are:
2695
a933dad1
DL
2696**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2697
2698Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2699package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2700properties defined.
2701
2702**** GIF, image type `gif'
2703
2704Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2705`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2706
2707Additional image properties supported are:
2708
2709`:index INDEX'
2710
2711INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2712multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
2713
2714This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
2715For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
2716at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
2717every 0.1 seconds.
2718
2719(defun show-anim (file max)
2720 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
2721 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
2722
2723(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
2724 (when (= idx max)
2725 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 2726 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
2727 (save-excursion
2728 (set-buffer buffer)
2729 (goto-char (point-min))
2730 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
2731 (insert-image img "x"))
2732 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
2733
2734**** PNG, image type `png'
2735
2736Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
2737package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2738properties defined.
2739
2740**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
2741
2742Additional image properties supported are:
2743
2744`:pt-width WIDTH'
2745
2746WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 2747integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
2748
2749`:pt-height HEIGHT'
2750
2751HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 2752must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
2753
2754`:bounding-box BOX'
2755
2756BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
2757the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
2758files. This is an required property.
2759
2760Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
2761lisp/gs.el.
2762
2763*** Lisp interface.
2764
79214ddf
FP
2765The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
2766which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
2767
2768Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
2769they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
2770The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
2771manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
2772images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
2773
2774*** Simplified image API, image.el
2775
2776The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
2777creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
2778can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
2779define an image based on available image types. The functions
2780`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
2781buffer.
2782
2783+++
2784** Display margins.
2785
2786Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
2787and images.
2788
2789To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
2790`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
2791`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
2792obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
2793`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
2794the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
2795of the display margins.
2796
2797You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
2798containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
2799one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
2800string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
2801in this file).
2802
2803+++
2804** Help display
2805
2806Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
2807moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
2808`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
2809that have a `help-echo' property.
2810
2811The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar
2812items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display.
2813If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is
2814evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the
2815tool-bar item is used.
2816
2817The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
2818help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
2819help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
2820
2821+++
2822** Vertical fractional scrolling.
2823
2824The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
2825This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
2826
2827The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
2828scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
2829The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
2830scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
2831used.
2832
79214ddf
FP
2833 (global-set-key [A-down]
2834 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 2835 (interactive)
79214ddf 2836 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 2837 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 2838 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
2839 #'(lambda ()
2840 (interactive)
79214ddf 2841 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
2842 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
2843
2844+++
2845** New hook `fontification-functions'.
2846
2847Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
2848when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
2849variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
2850is called with one argument, POS.
2851
2852At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
2853characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
2854as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
2855property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
2856`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
2857
2858+++
2859** Tool bar support.
2860
2861Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
2862parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
2863controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
2864suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
2865`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
2866automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
2867
2868*** Tool bar item definitions
2869
2870Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
2871`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
2872where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 2873
a933dad1
DL
2874CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
2875evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
2876the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
2877property (see below).
79214ddf 2878
a933dad1
DL
2879BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
2880binding are currently ignored.
2881
2882The following properties are recognized:
2883
2884`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 2885
a933dad1
DL
2886FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
2887or disabled.
79214ddf 2888
a933dad1 2889`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 2890
a933dad1 2891FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 2892
a933dad1
DL
2893`:filter FUNCTION'
2894
2895FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
2896FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
2897used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 2898
a933dad1
DL
2899`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
2900
2901TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
2902and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 2903
a933dad1
DL
2904`:image IMAGES'
2905
2906IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
2907image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
2908meaning of each of the four elements:
2909
2910 Index Use when item is
2911 ----------------------------------------
2912 0 enabled and selected
2913 1 enabled and deselected
2914 2 disabled and selected
2915 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 2916
4ba7246d
GM
2917If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
2918algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
2919
a933dad1 2920`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 2921
a933dad1
DL
2922Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
2923is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
2924
2925*** Tool-bar-related variables.
2926
2927If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
2928resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
2929than 1/4 of the frame's size.
2930
79214ddf 2931If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
2932raised when the mouse moves over them.
2933
2934You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
2935`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
2936pixels. Default is 1.
2937
2938You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
2939`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
2940
2941*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
2942
2943You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 2944a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
2945
2946 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
2947 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
2948 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
2949
2950is the original tool bar item definition, then
2951
2952 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
2953
2954makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
2955item.
2956
2957** Mode line changes.
2958
2959+++
2960*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
2961
2962The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
2963that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
2964a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
2965
29661. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
2967a `local-map' text property.
2968
29692. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
2970that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
2971
29723. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
2973is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
2974`local-map' property.
2975
2976The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
2977properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
2978example.
2979
54522c9f
GM
2980*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
2981evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
2982
a933dad1
DL
2983+++
2984*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
2985variable mode-line-format to nil.
2986
2987+++
2988*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
2989
2990This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
2991`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
2992completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
2993`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
2994line.
2995
2996The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
2997`header-line'.
2998
2999The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3000position in the header-line.
3001
3002+++
3003** Text property `display'
3004
3005The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
3006also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
3007`display' property should be a display specification, as described
3008below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3009
3010*** Variable width and height spaces
3011
3012To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3013specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3014`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3015area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3016marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3017displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3018simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3019
3020The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3021PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3022properties described below.
3023
3024The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3025characters having the `display' property.
3026
3027- :width WIDTH
3028
3029Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3030character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3031
3032- :relative-width FACTOR
3033
3034Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3035first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3036same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3037width of that character by FACTOR.
3038
3039- :align-to HPOS
3040
3041Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3042value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3043
3044Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3045
3046- :height HEIGHT
3047
3048Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3049normal line height.
3050
3051- :relative-height FACTOR
3052
3053The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3054of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3055
3056- :ascent ASCENT
3057
3058Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3059used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3060baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3061equal to 100.
3062
3063You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3064
3065*** Images
3066
3067A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3068. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3069in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3070their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3071the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3072`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3073area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3074the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3075as display specification.
3076
3077*** Other display properties
3078
3079- :space-width FACTOR
3080
3081Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3082should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3083integer or float.
3084
3085- :height HEIGHT
3086
3087Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3088
3089If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3090means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3091the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3092``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3093a font is available counts as a step.
3094
3095If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3096as tall as the frame's default font.
3097
3098If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3099height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3100
3101Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3102`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3103
3104- :raise FACTOR
3105
3106FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3107font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3108raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3109amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3110`:height' subproperty.
3111
3112*** Conditional display properties
3113
3114All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3115has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3116applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3117During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3118the text having the `display' property.
3119
3120The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3121`(:when t SPEC)'.
3122
3123+++
3124** New menu separator types.
3125
3126Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3127item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3128treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3129to specify other menu separator types.
3130
3131- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3132
3133No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3134separator occurs.
3135
3136- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3137
3138A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3139
3140- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3141
3142A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3143
3144- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3145
3146A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3147
3148- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3149
3150A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3151
3152- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3153
3154A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3155displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3156
3157- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3158
3159A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3160
3161- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3162
3163A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3164
3165- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3166
3167A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3168
3169- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3170
3171Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3172
3173- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3174
3175Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3176
3177- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3178
3179Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3180
3181- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3182
3183Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3184
3185Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3186the corresponding single-line separators.
3187
3188+++
3189** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3190
3191The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3192`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3193Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3194that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3195default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3196default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3197default foreground is black.
3198
3199The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3200(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3201`ScrollBarBackground').
3202
3203Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3204settings for scroll bar colors.
3205
3206+++
3207** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3208display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3209
3210---
3211** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3212starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3213on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3214line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3215the original window start.
3216
3217---
3218** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3219`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3220now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3221
3222+++
3223** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3224
3225A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3226`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3227windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3228other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3229
3230The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3231fixed-width and fixed-height.
3232
3233 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3234
3235A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3236fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3237window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3238change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3239temporarily to nil, for example
3240
3241 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3242 (enlarge-window 10))
3243
79214ddf 3244Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3245or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3246
3247** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3248terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3249to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3250overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3251horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3252support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050
DL
3253^L
3254* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3255
3256** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3257input.
3258
3259** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3260
3261** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3262
3263** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3264only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3265exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3266(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3267(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3268
3269** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3270been added.
3271
3272^L
3273* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3274
3275** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3276
e33b0397
DL
3277^L
3278* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3279
3280** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3281M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
a933dad1
DL
3282\f
3283* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3284
3285** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3286
3287You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3288Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3289`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3290
3291If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3292is the one that is used.
3293
3294** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3295the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3296Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3297separate from the command's regular output.
3298Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3299says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3300In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3301the buffer name.
3302
3303When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3304output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3305it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3306cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3307
3308** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3309the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3310is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3311created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3312
3313** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3314example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3315match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3316quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3317
3318** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3319now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3320if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3321they never ignore case.
3322
3323** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3324under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3325applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3326of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3327just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3328convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3329part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3330
3331If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3332the same format that was used in the file before.
3333
3334You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3335`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3336
3337** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3338renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3339This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3340
3341** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3342The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3343buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3344your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3345is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3346end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3347Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3348
3349The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3350eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3351control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3352format. You can now customize these variables.
3353
3354** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3355filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3356filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3357enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3358
3359** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3360in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3361windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3362
3363** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3364dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3365doesn't have any effect.
3366
3367** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3368not one per buffer.
3369
3370** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3371use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3372 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3373
3374** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3375To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3376`auto-show-mode' command.
3377
3378** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3379avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3380versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3381choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3382occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3383
3384** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3385cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3386
3387** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3388character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3389feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3390
3391** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3392the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3393interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3394and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3395
3396** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3397
3398The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3399that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3400one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3401codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3402set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3403
3404Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3405from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3406
3407IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3408equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3409a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3410`?' on other systems.
3411
3412IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3413feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3414Unix.
3415
3416Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3417current codepage when it starts.
3418
3419** Mail changes
3420
feab4fba
GM
3421*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3422`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3423appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3424non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3425MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3426headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3427latin-1:
3428
3429 MIME-version: 1.0
3430 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3431 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3432
a933dad1
DL
3433*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3434default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3435default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3436sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3437buffer-file-coding-system.
3438
3439You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3440sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3441mail.
3442
3443*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3444if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3445Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3446list of possible coding systems.
3447
3448** CC Mode changes
3449
3450*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3451modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3452longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3453docstring for details.
3454
3455*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3456symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3457found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3458prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3459lineup functions use this feature currently.
3460
3461*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3462"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3463
3464*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3465"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3466
3467*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3468from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3469symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3470c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3471anonymous classes.
3472
3473*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3474syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3475
3476*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3477inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3478support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3479function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3480
3481*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3482(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3483brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3484c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3485(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3486
3487*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3488
3489*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3490
3491*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3492for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3493
3494*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3495
3496*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3497associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3498This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3499circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3500class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3501
3502** Gnus changes.
3503
3504*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3505added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3506Gnus manual for the full story.
3507
3508*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3509before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3510group, which is created automatically.
3511
3512*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3513values.
3514
3515*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3516
3517*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3518outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3519
3520*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3521`C-u C-c C-c'.
3522
3523*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3524
3525*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3526re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3527
3528*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3529
3530*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3531Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3532
3533*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3534`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3535
3536*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3537control over simplification.
3538
3539*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3540
3541*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3542limit.
3543
3544*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3545
3546*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3547
79214ddf 3548*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
a933dad1
DL
3549If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3550rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3551
3552*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3553`a' forces normal posting method.
3554
3555*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3556-- `W d'.
3557
3558*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3559to a non-nil value.
3560
3561*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3562where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3563
3564*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3565has been added.
3566
3567*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3568
3569*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3570
3571*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3572`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3573
3574*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3575`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3576
3577*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3578
3579*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3580been added.
3581
3582*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3583`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3584
3585*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3586updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3587
3588*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3589
3590*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3591
3592*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3593
3594** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3595
3596*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3597options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3598nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3599
3600*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3601TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3602of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3603TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3604can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3605
3606*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3607All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3608but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3609the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3610
3611*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3612the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3613buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3614mismatch.
3615
3616** Changes to RefTeX mode
3617
3618*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3619file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3620
3621*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3622lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3623characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3624removed from the label.
3625
3626*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3627a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3628
3629*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3630customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3631
3632*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3633`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
79214ddf 3634expressions.
a933dad1
DL
3635
3636*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3637
3638** New/deleted modes and packages
3639
3640*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3641SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3642
3643*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3644editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3645SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3646
3647*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3648changes with a special face.
3649
3650*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3651this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3652Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3653\f
3654* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3655
3656** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3657This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3658conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3659and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3660check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3661
3662The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3663Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3664distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3665
3666** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3667MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3668controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3669directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3670Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3671on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3672string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3673program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3674printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3675
3676** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3677output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3678available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3679input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3680temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3681program.
3682
3683An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3684and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3685programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3686automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3687as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3688ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3689
3690** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3691a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3692MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3693was not documented clearly before.
3694
3695** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
3696This includes Tetris and Snake.
3697\f
3698* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
3699
3700** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
3701return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
3702They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
3703meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
3704
3705** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
3706WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
3707and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
3708
3709** Changes in the file-attributes function.
3710
3711*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
3712It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
3713
3714*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
3715the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
3716integers.
3717
3718** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
3719files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
3720arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
3721file names and attributes are returned.
3722
3723** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
3724sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
3725accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
3726It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
3727returns the result.
3728
3729** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
3730to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
3731
3732** New functions for base64 conversion:
3733
3734The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
3735into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
3736performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
3737optionally.
3738
3739Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
3740job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
3741
3742**
3743The new function process-running-child-p
3744will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
3745terminal to its own child process.
3746
3747** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
3748when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
3749to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
3750itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
3751
3752** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
3753be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
3754
3755** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
3756:included is an alias for :visible.
3757
3758easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
3759easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
3760to move or copy menu entries.
3761
3762** Multibyte editing changes
3763
3764*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
3765an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
3766make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
3767work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
3768char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
3769 (setq char (sref str idx)
3770 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
3771The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
3772
3773If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
3774(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
3775 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
3776
3777*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
3778region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
3779deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
3780
3781 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
3782
3783This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
3784across the boundary.
3785
3786*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
3787`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
3788 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
3789 contains 8-bit characters.
3790 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
3791 contains invalid characters.
3792
3793*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
3794text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
3795preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
3796text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
3797way.
3798
3799*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
3800If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
3801end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
3802prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
3803
3804*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
3805compose Thai characters in a string.
3806
3807** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
3808argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
3809for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
3810menus should always use the third argument.
3811
3812** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
3813read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
3814arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
3815input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
3816
3817** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
3818of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
3819programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
3820inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
3821
3822** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
3823the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
3824returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
3825echo area contents.
3826
3827 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
3828
3829** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
3830NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
3831requested feature cannot be loaded.
3832
3833** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
3834foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
79214ddf 3835means to clear out that attribute.
a933dad1
DL
3836
3837** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
3838gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
3839
3840** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
3841read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
3842unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
3843end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
3844
3845** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
3846the gap of the current buffer.
3847
3848** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
3849to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
3850current buffer.
3851
3852** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
3853facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
3854These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
3855it back in after any modifications have been made.
3856\f
3857* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
3858
3859** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
3860the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
3861/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
3862directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
3863subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
3864
3865Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
3866names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
3867Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
3868which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
3869these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
3870
3871Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
3872starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
3873time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
3874
3875This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
3876Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
3877to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
3878subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
3879`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
3880results.
3881
3882** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
3883GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
3884that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
3885fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
3886\f
3887* Changes in Emacs 20.3
3888
3889** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
3890including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
3891it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
3892perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
3893
3894** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
3895specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
3896region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
3897further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
3898command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
3899within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
3900are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
3901region.
3902
3903In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
3904selective undo.
3905
3906** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
3907unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
3908buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
3909effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
3910Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
3911
3912The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
3913though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
3914-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
3915load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
3916
3917** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
3918no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
3919enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
3920something that most users not do.
3921
3922** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
3923operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
3924The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
3925applications.
3926
3927C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
3928pasting operations.
3929
3930** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
3931setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
3932like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
3933printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
3934`ps-printer-name'.
3935
3936** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
3937minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
3938any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
3939except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
3940incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
3941hits a new word.
3942
3943Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
3944Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
3945to be confused by TeX commands.
3946
3947You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
3948correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
3949clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
3950of various alternative replacements and actions.
3951
3952Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
3953the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
3954corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
3955alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
3956flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
3957
3958Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
3959flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
3960
3961** Changes in input method usage.
3962
3963Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
3964the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
3965respectively.
3966
3967You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
3968
3969If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
3970of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
3971
3972The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
3973that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
3974
3975 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
3976
3977 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
3978
3979 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
3980 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
3981
3982 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
79214ddf 3983 given in the following case:
a933dad1
DL
3984 o When you are using a complex input method.
3985 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
3986
3987If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
3988input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
3989and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
3990setting it to t is helpful.
3991
3992The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
3993
3994In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
3995keys:
3996 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
3997 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
3998 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
3999These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4000environment.
4001
4002** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4003names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4004minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4005get
4006
4007 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4008
4009which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4010
4011Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4012Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4013
4014** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4015at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4016its owner and group.
4017
4018** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4019Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4020
4021** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4022contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4023
4024** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4025which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4026in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4027by the left edge of the rectangle.
4028
4029** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4030increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4031C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4032for writing keyboard macros.
4033
4034** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4035files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4036frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4037the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4038additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4039info.
4040
4041** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4042
4043** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4044query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4045contents only.
4046
4047** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4048confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4049the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4050says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4051
4052** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4053non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4054literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4055
4056** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4057now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4058Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4059inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4060
4061** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4062failure if the command produces no output.
4063
4064** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4065manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4066the mouse.
4067
4068** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4069mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4070function and variable names.
4071
4072** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4073reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4074file-coding-system-alist.
4075
4076** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4077t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4078converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4079the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4080according to the current fontset.
4081
4082** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4083
4084The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4085that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4086nonascii-insert-offset.
4087
4088For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4089enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4090nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4091characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4092
4093** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4094an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4095
4096** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4097letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4098
4099** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4100are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4101command keys.
4102
4103** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4104user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4105
4106Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4107user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4108all variables that have documentation.
4109
4110** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4111shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4112that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4113minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4114it should show; the default is 20.
4115
4116Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4117the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4118of your input.
4119
4120** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4121all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4122recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4123argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4124the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4125Newly added options are included as well.
4126
4127If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4128then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4129for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4130
4131This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4132Customize menu.
4133
4134** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4135the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4136
4137** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4138buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4139invoked.
4140
4141** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4142that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4143The default is 1.
4144
4145** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4146syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4147new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4148(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4149sensibly.
4150
4151** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4152
4153** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4154value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4155two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4156
4157** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4158reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4159for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4160every night.
4161
7464346d
GM
4162** Desktop changes
4163
4164*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
a933dad1
DL
4165the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4166
7464346d
GM
4167*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4168and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4169
a933dad1
DL
4170** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4171read and post multi-lingual articles.
4172
4173** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4174doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4175be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4176outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4177the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
79214ddf 4178made invisible again.
a933dad1
DL
4179
4180** Mail reading and sending changes
4181
4182*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4183the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4184changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4185toggle.
4186
4187*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4188now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4189summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4190the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4191rmail-default-body-file.
4192
4193*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4194longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4195handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4196
4197*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4198it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4199is evaluated to insert the signature.
4200
4201*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4202outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4203handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4204putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4205transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4206especially interested in trying feedmail.
4207
4208feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4209feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4210provided by feedmail are:
4211
4212**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4213stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4214there is also a queue for draft messages
4215
4216**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4217be prompted for confirmation
4218
4219**** does smart filling of address headers
4220
4221**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4222the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4223can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4224
4225**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4226the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4227/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4228function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4229
4230** Dired changes
4231
4232*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4233files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4234
4235*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4236run Dired on the directory name at point.
4237
4238*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4239files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4240for a specified regexp.
4241
4242** VC Changes
4243
4244*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4245conveniently.
4246
4247*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4248faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4249Dired.
4250
4251VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4252directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4253listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4254currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4255
4256You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4257then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4258vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4259control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4260on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4261
4262All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4263is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4264`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4265the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4266`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4267
4268The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4269toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
79214ddf 4270VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
a933dad1
DL
4271`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4272
4273Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4274ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4275command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4276
4277*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4278file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4279session to resolve them.
4280
4281Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4282resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4283contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4284uses as well).
4285
4286*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4287command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4288you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4289either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4290branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4291If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4292using ediff.
4293
4294** Changes in Font Lock
4295
4296*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4297are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4298use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4299unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4300compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4301
4302** Frame name display changes
4303
4304*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4305frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4306raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4307when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4308
4309*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4310frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4311menu.
4312
4313** Comint (subshell) changes
4314
4315*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4316subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4317with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4318
4319*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4320
4321C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4322that is, the line after the last line you got.
4323You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4324
4325C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4326send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4327the following line.
4328
4329C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4330which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4331previously sent input.
4332
4333C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4334it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4335as the search string.
4336
4337*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4338automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4339
4340** C mode changes
4341
4342*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4343and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4344assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
79214ddf 4345definition.
a933dad1
DL
4346
4347*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4348(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4349Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4350style is still the default however.
4351
4352*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4353
4354*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4355are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4356them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4357
4358*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4359and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4360
4361*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4362namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4363
4364*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4365makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4366
4367*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4368c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4369
4370*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4371should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4372package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4373variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4374
4375** Changes to hippie-expand.
4376
79214ddf 4377*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
a933dad1
DL
4378non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4379which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4380
4381*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4382non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4383expanding dynamically.
4384
4385*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4386non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4387
4388*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4389non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4390this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4391expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4392
4393*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4394
4395** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4396
4397*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4398bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4399automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4400bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4401against the first word in the title.
4402
4403*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4404capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4405bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
79214ddf 4406lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
a933dad1 4407lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
79214ddf 4408bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
a933dad1
DL
4409
4410*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4411generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4412replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4413bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4414
4415** Changes in vcursor.el.
4416
4417*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4418and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4419variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4420entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4421`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4422in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4423
4424*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4425Editing group once the package is loaded.
4426
4427*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4428generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4429vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4430
4431*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4432vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4433
4434** Ispell changes.
4435
79214ddf
FP
4436*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4437buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
a933dad1
DL
4438are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4439
4440*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4441A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4442and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4443defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
79214ddf 4444include:
a933dad1
DL
4445
4446 o URLs are automatically skipped
4447 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4448
4449*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4450
4451** Changes to RefTeX mode
4452
4453RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4454large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4455re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4456section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4457
4458*** New recursive parser.
4459
4460The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4461entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4462recursive parser scans the individual files.
4463
4464*** Parsing only part of a document.
79214ddf 4465
a933dad1
DL
4466Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4467partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4468the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4469
4470 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4471
4472*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4473
4474This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4475
4476 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4477
4478*** Using multiple selection buffers
4479
4480If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4481for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4482
4483 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4484
4485*** References to external documents.
4486
4487The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4488documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4489documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4490macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4491RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4492the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4493The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4494
4495*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4496
4497The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4498and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4499
4500Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4501the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4502
4503*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4504
4505The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4506buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4507
4508*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4509
4510The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4511contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4512`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4513have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4514enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4515at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4516more.
4517
4518*** Support for the varioref package
4519
4520The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4521
4522*** New hooks
4523
4524Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4525and citations are created. These hooks are
4526`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4527`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4528
4529*** Citations outside LaTeX
4530
4531The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4532a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4533
4534*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4535
4536The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4537fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4538fontified, use
4539
4540 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4541
4542** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4543With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4544the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4545directories that contain the same file name.
4546
4547Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4548Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4549file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4550Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4551have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4552names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4553directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4554directory.
4555
4556** New modes and packages
4557
4558*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4559It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4560it, but some do not.
4561
4562*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4563code.
4564
4565*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4566current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4567around in a buffer.
4568
4569Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4570
4571*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4572uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4573be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4574established system of notation similar to Chess.
4575
4576*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4577documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4578guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4579
4580*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4581available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4582system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4583simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4584functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4585the like.
4586
4587*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4588identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4589
4590*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4591within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4592used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4593the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4594
4595*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4596
4597 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4598 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4599 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4600 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4601 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4602 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4603 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4604 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4605 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4606 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4607 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4608
4609 Platform-specific modes:
4610
4611 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4612 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4613 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4614 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4615 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4616 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4617 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4618 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4619 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4620\f
4621* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4622
4623** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4624use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4625That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4626Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4627
4628Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4629you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4630consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4631
4632** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4633and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4634specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4635searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4636
4637** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4638multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4639character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4640environment.
4641
4642** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4643take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4644string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4645current input method for reading this one event.
4646
4647** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4648now control whether to output certain characters as
4649backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4650non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4651characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4652in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4653\f
4654* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4655
4656** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4657of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4658
4659** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4660in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4661always increases point by 1.
4662
4663The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4664considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4665
4666See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4667
4668** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4669Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4670default value changed. For example,
4671
4672 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4673 :type 'integer
4674 :group 'foo
4675 :version "20.3")
4676
79214ddf 4677 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
a933dad1
DL
4678 :version "20.3")
4679
4680If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4681default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4682is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4683`:version' in the top level group.
4684
4685This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4686
4687** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4688starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4689
4690However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4691symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4692support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4693to themselves.
4694
4695If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
4696this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
4697values whatever.
4698
4699** There is a new debugger command, R.
4700It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
4701in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
4702
4703** Frame-local variables.
4704
4705You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
4706the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
4707local bindings for that variable.
4708
4709These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
4710frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
4711modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
4712parameter name.
4713
4714Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
4715Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
4716active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
4717that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
4718
4719It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
4720clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
4721very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
4722through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
4723
4724** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
4725"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
4726evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
4727makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
4728See the documentation in sregex.el.
4729
4730** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
4731is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
4732parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
4733The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
4734
4735** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
4736If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
4737
4738** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
4739known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
4740define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
4741
4742** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
4743when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
4744it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
4745history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
4746
4747The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
4748return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
4749empty input.
4750
4751** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
4752for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
4753`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
4754Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
4755`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
4756
4757** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
4758echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
4759a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
4760default password to use if the user enters nothing.
4761
4762** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
4763specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
4764function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
4765place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
4766non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
4767
4768** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
4769If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
4770up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
4771end of the window, even if this requires computation.
4772
4773** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
4774which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
4775If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
4776
4777** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
4778holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
4779was directed to display this buffer.
4780
4781** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
4782with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
4783describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
4784other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
4785set-window-configuration.
4786
4787** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
4788window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
4789positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
4790windows and the choice of buffers to display.
4791
4792** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
4793override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
4794look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
4795
4796If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
4797non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
4798map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
4799
4800minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
4801and it is meant to be set by major modes.
4802
4803** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
4804except that it discards all text properties from the result.
4805
4806** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
4807USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
4808floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
4809
4810** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
4811to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
4812in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
4813it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
4814
4815** Menu changes
4816
4817*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
4818keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
4819better supported.
4820
4821The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
4822a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
4823you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
4824can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
4825then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
4826
4827*** A new format for menu items is supported.
4828
4829In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
4830 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
4831defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
4832starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
4833
4834The format is:
4835 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
4836 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
4837where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
4838string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
4839The supported properties include
4840
4841:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4842 item is enabled.
4843:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4844 item should appear in the menu.
79214ddf 4845:filter FILTER-FN
a933dad1
DL
4846 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
4847 which will be REAL-BINDING.
4848 It should return a binding to use instead.
4849:keys DESCRIPTION
4850 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
4851 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
4852 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
4853:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
4854 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
4855 keyboard binding.
4856:key-sequence nil
4857 This means that the command normally has no
4858 keyboard equivalent.
4859:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
4860:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
4861 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
4862 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
4863 value says whether this button is currently selected.
4864
4865Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
4866Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
4867
4868(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
4869
4870** New event types
4871
4872*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
4873mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
4874corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
4875which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
4876
4877 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
4878
4879where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4880same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
4881indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
4882negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
4883the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
4884forward, away from the user.
4885
4886As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4887
4888*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
4889files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
4890and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
4891filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
4892loaded into Emacs. The format is:
4893
4894 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
4895
4896where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4897same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
4898that were dragged and dropped.
4899
4900As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4901
4902** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
4903
4904*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
4905any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
4906to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
4907
4908*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
4909can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
4910that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
4911
4912*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
4913in Emacs 19 and before.
4914
4915The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
4916The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
4917
4918*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
4919buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
4920unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
4921representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
4922
4923This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
4924as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
4925viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
4926one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
4927will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
4928
4929This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
4930representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
4931(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
4932consistent with the new representation.
4933
4934*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
4935representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
4936about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
4937however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4938
4939The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
4940nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
4941using the table nonascii-translation-table.
4942
4943*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
4944representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
4945representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4946
4947The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
4948loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
4949is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
4950
4951*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4952which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
4953
4954*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4955which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
4956
4957*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
4958portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
4959so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
4960You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
4961
4962*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
4963it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
4964
4965*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
4966convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
4967buffer or string being searched.
4968
4969One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
4970[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
4971searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
4972searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
4973obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
4974you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
4975expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
4976
4977*** Structure of coding system changed.
4978
4979All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
4980by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
4981which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
4982as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
4983vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
4984your own alias name of a coding system by the function
4985define-coding-system-alias.
4986
4987The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
4988the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
4989access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
4990pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
4991character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
4992safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
4993'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
4994`iso-8859-1'.
4995
4996Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
4997The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
4998coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
4999(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5000
5001Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5002also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5003are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5004the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5005
5006*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5007proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5008This function requires a user interaction.
5009
5010*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5011find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5012select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5013systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5014a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5015select-safe-coding-system.
5016
5017*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5018decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5019last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5020was done.
5021
5022*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5023used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5024coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5025
5026*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5027return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5028characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5029`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5030
5031*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5032coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5033coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5034converted.
5035
5036*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5037coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5038
5039*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5040character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5041character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5042each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5043either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5044range of characters.
5045
5046*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5047Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5048
5049*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5050in the current buffer at position POS.
5051
5052*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5053input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5054function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5055character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5056event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5057binding input-method-function to nil.
5058
5059The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5060method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5061input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5062the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5063not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5064
5065The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5066subsequent events of a key sequence.
5067
5068*** You can customize any language environment by using
5069set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5070
5071The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5072customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5073instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5074environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5075exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5076\f
5077* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5078
5079** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5080options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5081at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5082tree structure.
5083
5084M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5085user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5086
5087With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5088session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5089in your .emacs file.)
5090
5091** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5092You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5093
5094** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5095This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5096
5097** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5098immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5099kills the region.
5100
5101The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5102delete the character before point, as usual.
5103
5104** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5105on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5106by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5107
5108** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5109insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5110the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5111onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5112history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5113past.)
5114
5115** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5116This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5117in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5118TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5119makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5120
5121As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5122and is an alias for it.
5123
5124If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5125use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5126
5127** Scrolling changes
5128
5129*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5130position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5131
5132In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5133on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5134where it started.
5135
5136*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5137move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5138screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5139does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5140
5141*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5142top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5143comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5144recenters the window.
5145
5146** International character set support (MULE)
5147
5148Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5149including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5150Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5151Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5152features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5153MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5154
5155Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5156coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5157character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5158variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5159into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5160
5161Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5162generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5163supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5164language, to make it possible to type them.
5165
5166The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5167character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5168
5169The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5170to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5171
5172You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5173
5174 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5175
5176Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5177characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5178argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5179already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5180characters for their work until they want to change.
5181
5182*** Input methods
5183
5184An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5185specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5186has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5187the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5188support several input methods.
5189
5190The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5191another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5192work.
5193
5194A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5195characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5196composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5197consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5198sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5199letter.
5200
5201The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5202by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5203First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5204marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5205mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5206
5207None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5208they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5209phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5210converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5211
5212Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5213word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5214typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5215the first guess is wrong.
5216
5217*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5218turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5219
5220If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5221byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5222they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5223the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5224
5225However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5226use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5227includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5228translate automatically to and from either one.
5229
5230*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5231
5232Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5233file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5234sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5235what you want.
5236
5237If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5238example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5239system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5240multibyte characters in that buffer.
5241
5242If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5243character conversion as well.
5244
5245*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5246
5247A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5248Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5249requires using many fonts.
5250
5251Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5252collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5253
5254A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5255the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5256have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5257you would use a font.
5258
5259If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5260specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5261display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5262
5263The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5264(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5265characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5266or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5267and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5268
5269*** Defining fontsets.
5270
5271Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5272chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5273with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5274
5275Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5276of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5277`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5278standard fontset are created automatically.
5279
5280If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5281argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5282FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5283with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5284name is `fontset-startup'.
5285
5286Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5287The resource value should have this form:
5288 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5289FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5290 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5291 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5292 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5293The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5294of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5295CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5296FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5297
5298Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5299last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5300You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5301
5302For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5303font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5304following resource,
5305 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5306the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5307 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5308Here is the substitution rule:
5309 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5310 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5311 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5312 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5313 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5314
5315The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5316fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5317that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5318
5319With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5320like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5321name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5322fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5323fontsets.
5324
5325*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5326defaults for a particular choice of language.
5327
5328Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5329method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5330visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5331already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5332language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5333system for new files that you create.
5334
5335It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5336set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5337whole Emacs session.
5338
5339For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5340chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5341with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5342
5343*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5344specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5345specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5346the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5347coding systems that Emacs supports.
5348
5349*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5350lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5351This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5352After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5353is used for *the immediately following command*.
5354
5355So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5356write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5357
5358If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5359then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5360
5361For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5362visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5363
5364*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5365construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5366to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5367specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5368of the file.
5369
5370*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5371the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5372code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5373translated into that character code.
5374
5375This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5376various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5377
5378By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5379
5380*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5381the coding system for keyboard input.
5382
5383Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5384with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5385some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5386
5387By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5388
5389Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5390input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5391translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5392to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5393designed to work with terminals.
5394
5395*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5396specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5397This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5398has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5399translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5400in the corresponding buffer.
5401
5402By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5403
5404*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5405to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5406It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5407
5408*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5409an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5410command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5411want to use.
5412
5413C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5414method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5415
5416*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5417layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5418remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5419which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5420
5421*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5422the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5423related information.
5424
5425*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5426HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5427scripts.
5428
5429*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5430information about the support for a particular language.
5431You specify the language as an argument.
5432
5433*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5434the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5435first dash.
5436
5437A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5438(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5439whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
54401 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5441
5442 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5443 B big5 (Chinese)
5444 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5445 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5446 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5447 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5448 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5449 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5450 K euc-korea (Korean)
5451 R koi8 (Russian)
5452 Q tibetan
5453 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5454 T lao
5455 T tis620 (Thai)
5456 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5457 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5458 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5459 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5460 z hz (Chinese)
5461
5462When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5463two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5464coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5465keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5466
5467*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5468conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5469
5470When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5471into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5472rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5473Rmail files themselves.
5474
5475*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5476conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5477
5478Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5479for sending mail:
5480
5481- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5482- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5483- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5484 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5485- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5486
5487*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5488to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5489Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5490translations.
5491
5492** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5493of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5494insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5495without any conversion.
5496
5497** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5498You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5499RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5500any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5501
5502** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5503functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5504
5505Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5506Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5507
5508Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5509mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5510
5511** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5512complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5513in the buffer before point.
5514
5515With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5516symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5517you are using.
5518
5519With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5520just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5521
5522** File locking works with NFS now.
5523
5524The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5525in the same directory as FILENAME.
5526
5527This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5528works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5529can become a bottleneck.
5530
5531The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5532does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5533create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5534file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5535rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5536so useful that the change is worth while.
5537
5538When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5539are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5540collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5541tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5542
5543** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5544it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5545show-paren-mode.
5546
5547** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5548selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5549delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5550
5551** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5552within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5553complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5554
5555** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5556it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5557set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5558
5559** Changes in View mode.
5560
5561*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5562Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5563
5564*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5565view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5566
5567*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5568previous state.
5569
5570*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5571scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5572
5573*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5574non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5575not just the selected window.
5576
5577*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5578read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5579turns View mode on or off.
5580
5581*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5582how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5583delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5584
5585** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5586now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5587
5588** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5589has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5590presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5591which version to compare with.
5592
5593** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
79214ddf 5594blocks if a match is inside the block.
a933dad1
DL
5595
5596The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5597is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5598isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5599shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5600
5601By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5602of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5603blocks, all of them or none.
5604
5605** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5606current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5607confirmation first.
5608
5609** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5610now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5611However, the mode will not be changed if
5612(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5613(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5614 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5615(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5616
5617This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5618
5619However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5620these commands do not change the major mode.
5621
5622** M-x occur changes.
5623
5624*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5625it performs a case-sensitive search.
5626
5627*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5628if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5629using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5630
5631** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5632in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5633window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5634that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5635buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5636
5637** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5638after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5639appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5640come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5641
5642** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5643selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5644buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5645
5646** Outline mode changes.
5647
5648*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5649
5650*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5651
5652** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5653you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5654Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5655was already active.
5656
5657The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5658unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5659get confused by it.
5660
5661If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5662set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5663
5664** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5665
5666*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5667conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5668character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5669including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5670
5671The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5672mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5673copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5674
5675*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5676are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5677values.
5678
5679`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5680case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5681`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5682case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5683
5684** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5685certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5686can be. The default value is 30.
5687
5688** Changes in Mail mode.
5689
5690*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5691Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5692composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5693`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
5694`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
5695behavior.
5696
5697C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
5698compose-mail-other-frame.
5699
5700*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
5701the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
5702replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
5703buffer that shows the original message.
5704
5705*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
5706with separator lines around the contents.
5707
5708*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
5709in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
5710definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
5711need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
5712
5713*** New features in the mail-complete command.
5714
5715**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
5716for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
5717controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
5718Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
5719
5720**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
5721to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
5722/etc/passwd.
5723
5724**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
5725to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
5726/etc/passwd.
5727
5728** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
5729special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
5730directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
5731reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
5732
5733Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
5734when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
5735be taken to be magic.
5736
5737** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
5738files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
5739available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
5740
5741M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
5742(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
5743
5744** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
5745suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
5746
5747In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
5748
5749new key dired.el binding old key
5750------- ---------------- -------
5751 * c dired-change-marks c
5752 * m dired-mark m
5753 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
5754 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
5755 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
5756 * u dired-unmark u
5757 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
5758 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
5759 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
5760 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
5761 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
5762 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
5763
5764** Rmail changes.
5765
5766*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
5767saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
5768chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
5769each time you run it.
5770
5771*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
5772whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
5773
5774*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
5775messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
5776means to move in the opposite direction.
5777
5778*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
5779you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
5780
5781*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
5782just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
5783It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
5784can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
5785for output.
5786
5787** Gnus changes.
5788
5789*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
5790
79214ddf
FP
5791*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
5792Gnus.
a933dad1 5793
79214ddf 5794*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
a933dad1
DL
5795`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
5796
5797*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
5798article mode line.
5799
5800*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
5801
5802*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
5803
5804(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
5805
5806*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
5807are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
5808`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
5809
5810*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
5811
5812*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
5813
5814*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
5815See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
5816
5817*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
5818Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
5819used to pick articles.
5820
5821*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
5822another have been added.
5823
5824 `M-x gnus-change-server'
5825
5826*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
5827generating lines in buffers.
5828
5829*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
5830`M-C-_'.
5831
5832*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
5833
5834*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
5835
5836 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
5837
5838*** Scores can be decayed.
79214ddf 5839
a933dad1
DL
5840 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
5841
5842*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
5843Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
5844
5845*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
5846the native server.
5847
5848 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
5849
5850*** A new command for reading collections of documents
5851(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
5852
5853*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
5854
5855*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
5856even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
5857
5858*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
5859(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
5860
5861 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
5862 a group.
5863
5864*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
5865sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
5866
5867 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
5868
5869*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
5870
5871 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
5872
5873*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
79214ddf 5874
a933dad1
DL
5875 Use the `Y c' command.
5876
5877*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
5878
5879*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
5880
5881 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
5882
5883*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
5884from incoming mail before saving the mail.
79214ddf 5885
a933dad1
DL
5886 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
5887
5888*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
5889
5890*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
5891the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
5892
5893 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
5894
5895Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
5896and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
5897from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
5898hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
5899this issue.)
5900
5901Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
5902automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
5903particular news group. This can be done by:
5904
5905 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
5906
5907Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
5908of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
5909"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
5910system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
5911for reading and posting).
5912
5913CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
5914 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
5915Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
5916newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
5917there.
5918
5919Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
5920default. Here are some of these default settings:
5921
5922 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
5923 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
5924 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
5925 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
5926 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
5927
5928When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
5929the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
5930
5931** CC mode changes.
5932
5933*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
5934code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
5935values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
5936this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
5937Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
5938loaded.
5939
5940If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
79214ddf 5941Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
a933dad1 5942style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
79214ddf
FP
5943share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
5944c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
a933dad1
DL
5945must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
5946
5947*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
5948of the current buffer.
5949
5950*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
5951it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
5952of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
5953
5954*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
5955style that the Python developers like.
5956
5957*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
5958This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
5959just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
5960
5961** VC Changes [new]
5962
5963** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
5964name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
5965directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
5966
5967This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
5968master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
5969developers.
5970
5971You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
5972RET in a buffer visiting that file.
5973
5974*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
5975other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
5976writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
5977calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
5978
5979*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
5980version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
5981
5982** Calendar changes.
5983
5984A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
5985of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
5986for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
5987
5988** ps-print changes
5989
79214ddf 5990There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
a933dad1
DL
5991
5992*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
5993
5994The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
5995formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
5996`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
5997`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
5998It defaults to `letter'.
5999If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6000
6001The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
79214ddf 6002of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
a933dad1
DL
6003non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6004
6005The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6006It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
79214ddf 6007It defaults to 1.
a933dad1
DL
6008
6009*** Horizontal layout
6010
6011The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6012`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6013All are measured in points.
6014
6015*** Vertical layout
6016
6017The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6018`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6019All are measured in points.
6020
6021*** Headers
6022
6023If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6024`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6025margin above the text.
6026
79214ddf 6027If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
a933dad1
DL
6028framing box is printed around the header.
6029
6030The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6031`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6032
79214ddf
FP
6033The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6034`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
a933dad1
DL
6035`ps-header-font-size'.
6036
6037*** Font managing
6038
6039The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6040used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6041`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6042elements to this alist.
6043
79214ddf 6044The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
a933dad1
DL
6045for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6046
6047** hideshow changes.
6048
6049*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
79214ddf 6050C++, ; for lisp).
a933dad1
DL
6051
6052*** Support for java-mode added.
6053
6054*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6055in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6056
6057*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6058the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6059way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6060
6061*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6062robust and a lot faster.
6063
79214ddf 6064*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
a933dad1
DL
6065
6066*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6067to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6068documentation for more details.
6069
6070** Changes in Enriched mode.
6071
6072*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6073filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6074of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6075use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6076the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6077
6078*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6079distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6080as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6081as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6082
6083** Font Lock mode
6084
6085*** Custom support
6086
6087The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6088font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6089faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6090group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6091your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6092consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6093
6094You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6095
6096*** Maximum decoration
6097
6098Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6099default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6100of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6101supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6102to get the old behavior.
6103
6104*** New support
6105
6106Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6107
6108Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6109support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6110
6111*** Configurable support
6112
6113Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6114additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6115c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6116java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6117list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6118of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6119convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6120
6121Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6122way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6123it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6124
6125*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6126
6127You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6128highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6129for any mode.
6130
6131For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6132
6133 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6134
6135in your ~/.emacs.
6136
6137*** New faces
6138
6139Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6140font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6141distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6142to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6143
6144*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6145
6146The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6147cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6148same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6149
6150*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6151
6152The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6153according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6154the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6155non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6156refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6157the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6158Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6159
6160This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6161For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6162this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6163refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6164containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6165the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6166
6167As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6168
6169Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6170Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6171Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6172new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6173
6174If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6175settings.
6176
6177** Ada mode changes.
6178
6179*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6180If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6181procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6182you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6183stubs.
6184
6185*** There are two new commands:
6186 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6187 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6188
6189The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6190`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
79214ddf 6191`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
a933dad1
DL
6192
6193*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6194is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6195Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6196
6197*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6198formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6199places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6200space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6201
6202** Scheme mode changes.
6203
6204*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6205mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6206for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6207with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6208have any effect.
6209
6210If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6211still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6212scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6213variables as buffer-local variables.
6214
6215*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6216Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6217
133c9e59
GM
6218** Changes to the emacsclient program
6219
875c1439
GM
6220*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6221USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6222associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6223can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6224
133c9e59 6225*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
a933dad1
DL
6226it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6227buffer in Emacs.
6228
133c9e59
GM
6229*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6230use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6231ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6232option takes precedence.
6233
a933dad1
DL
6234** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6235constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6236(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6237
6238** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6239which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6240the current defun.
6241
6242** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6243following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6244
6245** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6246and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6247necessary).
6248
6249** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6250if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6251these register values no longer become completely useless.
6252If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6253asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6254it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6255
6256** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6257example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6258be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6259you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6260
6261You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6262variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6263file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6264revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6265only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6266
6267** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6268since it applies only to the current frame.
6269
6270** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6271file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6272and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6273
6274This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6275multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6276variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6277tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6278instead of just the file you are editing.
6279
6280** RefTeX mode
6281
6282RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6283and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6284different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6285multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6286turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6287
79214ddf 6288C-c ( reftex-label
a933dad1
DL
6289 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6290 knows which kind of label is needed.
6291
6292C-c ) reftex-reference
6293 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6294 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6295
6296C-c [ reftex-citation
6297 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6298 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6299
6300C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6301 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6302
6303C-c = reftex-toc
6304 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6305 can quickly jump to every section.
79214ddf 6306
a933dad1
DL
6307Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6308commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6309Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6310reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6311C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6312
6313** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6314
6315*** Info documentation is now available.
6316
6317*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6318both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6319
6320*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6321bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6322
6323*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6324(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6325
6326*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6327entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6328appropriate functions.
6329
6330*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6331entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6332
6333*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6334been cleaned.
6335
6336*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6337bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6338
6339*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6340shall be delimited.
6341
6342*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6343bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6344bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6345
6346*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6347field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6348prefixed with `ALT'.
6349
6350*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6351bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6352formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6353documentation).
6354
6355*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6356documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6357for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6358
6359*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6360comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6361
6362*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6363alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6364signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6365
6366*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6367
6368*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6369
6370*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6371from alien sources.
6372
6373*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6374to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6375crossref entries.
6376
6377*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6378region.
6379
6380*** Added support for imenu.
6381
6382*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6383of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6384`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6385`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6386
6387*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6388from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6389
6390** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6391
30a009a5 6392** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
047f434a 6393
a933dad1
DL
6394** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6395functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6396Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6397as an argument.
6398
6399When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6400and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6401
6402** browse-url changes
6403
6404*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6405Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6406(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6407non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6408customization variables.
6409
6410*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6411
6412*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6413lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6414(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6415
6416** Changes in Ediff
6417
6418*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6419pops up the Info file for this command.
6420
6421*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6422the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6423merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6424directories).
6425
6426*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6427and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6428files in the same directory.
6429
6430*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6431The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6432related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6433
6434** Changes in Viper
6435
6436*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
79214ddf 6437*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
a933dad1
DL
6438 instead of vip-.
6439*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
79214ddf 6440*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
a933dad1
DL
6441Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6442*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6443*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6444*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6445color when Viper is in insert state.
6446*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6447Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6448viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6449
6450** Etags changes.
6451
6452*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6453default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6454Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6455variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6456not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6457
6458*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6459
6460*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6461constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6462
6463*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6464recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6465In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6466
6467*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6468C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6469recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6470methods and protocols.
6471
6472*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6473.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6474column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6475paragraph name.
6476
6477*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6478an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6479at least M times and as many as N times.
6480
6481** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6482in files has changed slightly.
6483
6484With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6485time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6486This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6487with old time-stamp-format values.
6488
6489In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6490(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6491This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6492reasons.
6493
6494In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6495natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6496fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6497(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6498time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6499specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6500
6501Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6502case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6503truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6504
6505The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6506being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6507future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6508recommended now will continue to work then.
6509
6510See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6511details.
6512
6513** There are some additional major modes:
6514
6515dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6516m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6517meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6518
6519** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6520copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6521into Emacs.
6522
6523** New Lisp packages include:
6524
6525*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6526
6527*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6528be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6529
6530*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6531
6532*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6533in shell buffers.
6534
6535*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6536See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6537and `elint-defun'.
6538
6539*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6540meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6541ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6542strings or comments.
6543
6544These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6545abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6546you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6547insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6548at these points.
6549
6550*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6551can visit them by short forms of their names.
6552
6553*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6554Emacs Lisp function at point.
6555
6556*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6557
6558*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6559switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6560
6561*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6562
6563*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6564
6565*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6566
6567*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6568from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6569
6570*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6571You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6572inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6573original place after inserting the copy.
6574
6575*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6576on the buffer.
6577
6578You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6579velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6580(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6581
6582Enable mouse-drag with:
6583 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6584-or-
6585 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6586
6587*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6588mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6589
6590*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6591It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6592
6593*** ogonek
6594
6595The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6596Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6597platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6598TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6599ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6600prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6601instance) and vice versa.
6602
6603To use this package load it using
6604 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6605Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
79214ddf 6606 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
a933dad1
DL
6607 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6608The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6609ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6610
6611*** Interface to ph.
6612
6613Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6614
6615The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6616services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6617these servers.
6618
6619*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6620
6621*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6622You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6623while the real cursor does not move.
6624
6625*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6626for visiting your favorite web sites.
6627
6628*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6629so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6630
6631** movemail change
6632
6633Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6634mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6635supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6636user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6637
6638This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6639\f
6640* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6641
6642** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6643
6644Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6645end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6646Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6647file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6648file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6649
6650To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6651C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6652coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6653specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6654LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6655save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6656\f
6657* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6658
6659** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6660Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6661vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6662Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6663
6664** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6665to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6666
6667In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6668don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6669"win".
6670
6671** Basic Lisp changes
6672
6673*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6674evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6675
6676*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6677be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6678or by the user.
6679
6680The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6681
6682*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6683
6684(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6685(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6686
6687*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6688usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6689its argument.
6690
6691*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6692
6693*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
6694
6695*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
6696
6697*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
6698error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
6699include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
6700`format' function.
6701
6702*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
6703or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
6704whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
6705
6706*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
6707either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
6708adding one of these suffixes.
6709
6710*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
6711which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
79214ddf 6712If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
a933dad1
DL
6713
6714We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
6715because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
6716
6717*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
6718
6719*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
6720You must load the `cl' library to define it.
6721
6722*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
6723conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
6724
6725 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
6726
6727BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
6728BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
6729
6730*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
6731choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
6732restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
6733works using `save-current-buffer'.
6734
6735*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
6736write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
6737of the last form.
6738
6739*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
6740which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
6741last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
6742as the last form.
6743
6744*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
6745characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
6746matches.
6747
6748For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
6749
6750*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
6751with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
6752Then it returns that string.
6753
6754For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
6755
6756(with-output-to-string
6757 (princ "The buffer is ")
6758 (princ (buffer-name)))
6759
6760returns "The buffer is foo".
6761
6762** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
6763is non-nil.
6764
6765These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
6766buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
6767characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
6768
6769*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
6770a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
6771
6772Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
6773character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
6774Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
6775position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
6776characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
6777 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
6778
6779ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
6780Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
6781non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
6782characters".
6783
6784The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
6785through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
6786"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
6787range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
6788leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
6789
6790*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
6791(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
6792multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
6793character, which may be more than one buffer position.
6794
6795This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
6796always one buffer position, need to be changed.
6797
6798However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
79214ddf 6799
a933dad1
DL
6800*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
6801because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
6802have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
6803the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
6804guaranteed.
6805
6806*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
6807between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
6808character).
6809
6810When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
6811
6812 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
6813 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
6814 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
6815 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
6816 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
6817
6818*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
6819
6820*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
6821`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
6822more than the number of characters.
6823
6824You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
6825it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
6826\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
6827is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
6828follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
6829newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
6830
6831*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
6832and returns a string containing those characters.
6833
6834*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
6835(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
6836counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
6837character, sref signals an error.
6838
6839*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
6840in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
6841string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6842
6843*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
6844in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
6845region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6846
6847*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
6848the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
6849to a vector of the characters in it.
6850
6851*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
6852of a string. You call it as follows:
6853
6854 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
6855
6856This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
6857STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
6858This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
6859Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
6860it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
6861
6862*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
6863if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6864
6865*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
6866if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6867
6868*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
6869to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
6870not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
6871which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
6872
6873(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
6874
6875This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
6876
6877The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
6878If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
6879are not included in the resulting value.
6880
6881The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
6882at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
6883WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
6884is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
6885
6886If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
6887place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
6888character extends across that column), then the padding character
6889PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
6890string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
6891column START-COLUMN.
6892
6893*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
6894the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
6895necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
6896difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
6897changed text, before the change.
6898
6899*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
6900sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
6901one character set for each script, not for each language.
6902
6903**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
6904
6905**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
6906
6907**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
6908set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
6909
6910**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
6911name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
6912which identify the character within that character set.
6913
6914**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
6915byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
6916opposite of split-char.
6917
6918**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
6919of all the characters between BEG and END.
6920
6921**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
6922of all the characters in a string.
6923
6924*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
6925and specifying coding systems.
6926
6927**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
6928system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
6929of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
6930(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
6931and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
6932as what to do about code conversion.)
6933
6934**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
6935name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
6936
6937**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6938for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6939except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
6940
6941Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6942which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
6943to match against a file name.
6944
6945VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6946a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6947decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6948to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6949systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6950specifies the coding system for encoding.
6951
6952If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6953or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6954
6955**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
6956the coding system to use for network sockets.
6957
6958Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6959which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
6960either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
6961service names.
6962
6963VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6964a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6965decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6966to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6967systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6968specifies the coding system for encoding.
6969
6970If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6971or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6972
6973**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6974for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6975except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
6976start the subprocess.
6977
6978**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
6979systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
6980when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
6981(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
6982to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
6983
6984**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
6985coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
6986subprocess.
6987
6988It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
6989but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
6990start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
6991connection permanently or until overridden.
6992
6993The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
6994file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
6995network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
6996coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
6997It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
6998system for one operation at a time.
6999
7000**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7001files, subprocesses or network connections.
7002
7003**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7004coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7005The value is a cons cell,
7006 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7007where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7008the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7009input to the subprocess.
7010
7011**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7012change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7013
7014** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7015customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7016you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7017
7018You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7019variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7020information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7021legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7022customization.
7023
7024Thus, instead of writing
7025
7026 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7027 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7028
7029you would now write this:
7030
7031 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7032 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7033 :type 'boolean
7034 :group foo)
7035
7036The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7037two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7038describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7039for a description of them.
7040
7041The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7042should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7043
7044 (defgroup ispell nil
7045 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7046 :group 'processes)
7047
7048The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7049group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7050but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7051to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7052second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7053
7054Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7055package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7056have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7057package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7058first-level subgroups.
7059
7060** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7061
7062This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7063separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7064
7065** easy-mmode
7066
7067The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7068developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7069only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7070predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7071`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7072`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7073
7074** Text property changes
7075
7076*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7077text property.
7078
7079*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7080previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7081place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7082functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7083starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7084
7085If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7086LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7087of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7088position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7089
7090*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7091value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7092is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7093
7094** Changes in invisibility features
7095
7096*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7097hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7098is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7099should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7100would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7101make the overlay visible.
7102
7103During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7104invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7105needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7106which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7107the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7108t when it should hide it.
7109
7110*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7111
7112Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
79214ddf
FP
7113invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7114and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
a933dad1 7115Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
79214ddf 7116manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
a933dad1
DL
7117Here is an example of how to do this:
7118
7119 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
79214ddf 7120 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
a933dad1 7121 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
79214ddf 7122 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
a933dad1
DL
7123
7124 ...
7125 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7126
7127 ...
7128 ;; When done with the overlays:
7129 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7130 ;; Or respectively:
7131 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7132
7133** Changes in syntax parsing.
7134
7135*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7136`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7137obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7138`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7139
7140If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7141is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7142used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7143
7144When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7145character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7146
7147 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7148 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7149
7150 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7151 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7152 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7153
7154 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7155 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7156 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7157 determine the syntax type of the character.
7158
7159 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7160 of the current buffer.
7161
7162*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7163value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7164for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7165
7166*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7167and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7168only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7169character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7170another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7171
7172These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7173text property.
7174
7175*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7176arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7177of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7178
7179*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7180(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7181element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7182nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7183string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7184
7185*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7186syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7187`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7188
7189** Changes in face features
7190
7191*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7192if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7193
7194*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7195of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7196
7197*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7198set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7199
7200*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7201set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7202
7203*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7204by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7205and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7206the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7207overlay property).
7208
7209This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7210arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7211
7212** Changes in file-handling functions
7213
7214*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7215directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7216they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7217is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7218
7219This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7220begins with ~.
7221
7222*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7223it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7224
7225*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7226the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7227
7228*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7229as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7230
7231*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7232character code conversion as well as other things.
7233
7234Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7235(formerly it did not).
7236
7237*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7238environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7239
7240*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7241instead of constant strings.
7242
7243*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7244to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7245any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7246
7247substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7248in the same way as before.
7249
7250*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7251The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7252which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7253
7254*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7255error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7256else, and returns nil.
7257
7258*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7259directory cannot be listed.
7260
7261** Changes in minibuffer input
7262
7263*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7264read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7265additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7266argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7267ways:
7268
7269 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7270 It is available through the history command M-n.
7271
7272*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7273read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7274argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7275minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7276enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7277
7278In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7279argument in this way.
7280
7281*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7282from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7283minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7284
7285** Echo area features
7286
7287*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7288echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7289minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7290after the echo area is cleared.
7291
7292*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7293in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7294
7295** Keyboard input features
7296
7297*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7298set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7299
7300*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7301received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7302by keyboard macros.
7303
7304** Frame-related changes
7305
7306*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7307creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7308hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7309
7310*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7311the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7312has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7313
7314*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7315selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7316value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7317in the selected frame.
7318
7319*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7320is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7321which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7322
7323** X Windows features
7324
7325*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7326x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7327x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7328
7329*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7330The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7331
7332*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7333MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7334A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7335
7336If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7337it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7338
7339** Subprocess features
7340
7341*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7342functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7343automatically.
7344
7345*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7346and returns the output from the command as a string.
7347
7348*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7349and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7350
7351** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7352does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7353
7354** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7355at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7356goes after the other menu items.
7357
7358** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
79214ddf 7359of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
a933dad1
DL
7360around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7361are in use.
7362
7363The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7364series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7365
7366Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7367after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7368form.
7369
7370** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7371is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7372but its hook is still run.
7373
7374** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7375for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7376
7377If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7378regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7379useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7380
7381This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7382are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7383filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7384warned.
7385
7386** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7387way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7388
7389** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7390integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7391functions like display-time.
7392
7393** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7394name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7395
7396** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7397can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7398is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7399
7400** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7401if there is an error in compilation.
7402
7403** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7404switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7405argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7406they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7407
7408** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7409Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7410the *scratch* buffer.
7411
7412** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7413The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7414where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7415e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7416
7417** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7418and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7419It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7420
7421** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7422using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7423variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7424and compose-mail-other-frame.
7425
7426** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7427can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7428full name of the specified user will be returned.
7429
7430** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7431of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7432where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7433in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7434option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7435files at all.
7436
7437** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7438and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7439width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7440the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7441
7442For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7443minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7444with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7445is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7446
7447** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7448
7449** imenu.el changes.
7450
7451You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
79214ddf 7452item from menu created by imenu.
a933dad1
DL
7453
7454An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7455#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7456select one of those items.
7457\f
7458* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7459\f
7460* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7461
7462** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7463mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7464
7465** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7466use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7467Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7468\f
7469* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7470
7471** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7472To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7473
7474** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7475conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7476matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7477expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7478word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7479all caps.
7480
7481** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7482at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7483
7484When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7485does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7486as in previous Emacs versions.
7487
7488** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7489non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7490time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7491frames.
7492
7493** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7494if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7495This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7496Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7497accident.
7498
7499** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7500keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7501It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7502line and then executing the macro.
7503
7504This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7505
7506** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7507(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7508characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7509characters.
7510
7511** Font Lock mode
7512
7513*** Font Lock support modes
7514
7515Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7516below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7517hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7518to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7519Font Lock mode is enabled.
7520
7521For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7522
7523 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7524
7525in your ~/.emacs.
7526
7527*** lazy-lock
7528
7529The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7530only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7531becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7532Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7533occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7534buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7535Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7536
7537To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7538
7539 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7540
7541To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7542
7543** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7544
7545*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7546paren and key.
7547
7548*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7549supported.
7550
7551** Gnus changes.
7552
7553Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7554commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7555significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7556previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7557
7558Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7559between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7560
79214ddf 7561*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
a933dad1
DL
7562variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7563obsolete.
7564
7565*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7566missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7567
7568 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7569
7570*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7571
7572 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7573
7574*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
79214ddf 7575referred.
a933dad1
DL
7576
7577*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7578
7579 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7580
7581*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7582
7583 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7584
7585*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
79214ddf 7586buffers.
a933dad1
DL
7587
7588 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7589
7590*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7591
7592 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7593
7594*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7595
7596 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7597
7598*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7599
7600 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7601
7602*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7603is possible.
7604
7605 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7606
7607*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7608groups of groups.
7609
7610*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7611
7612*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
79214ddf 7613batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
a933dad1
DL
7614
7615*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7616
7617*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7618
7619*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7620
7621 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7622
7623*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7624expiration times.
7625
7626*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7627
7628*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7629process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7630
7631*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7632articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7633bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7634
7635*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7636articles with the `*' command.
7637
7638*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7639
7640*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7641
7642 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7643
7644*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7645
79214ddf 7646*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
a933dad1
DL
7647`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7648
7649*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
79214ddf 7650buffer.
a933dad1
DL
7651
7652*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7653
7654*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7655
7656*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7657
7658 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7659
79214ddf 7660*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
a933dad1
DL
7661
7662 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7663
79214ddf 7664*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
a933dad1
DL
7665
7666*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7667
79214ddf 7668*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
a933dad1 7669
79214ddf 7670 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
a933dad1
DL
7671 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7672
7673*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
79214ddf 7674refetching.
a933dad1
DL
7675
7676 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7677
7678*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7679buffer to allow easier treatment.
7680
7681*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7682
7683*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7684
7685 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7686
7687*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
79214ddf 7688articles.
a933dad1
DL
7689
7690 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7691
79214ddf 7692*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
a933dad1
DL
7693
7694*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
7695cited text to hide is now customizable.
7696
7697 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
7698
7699*** Boring headers can be hidden.
7700
7701 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
7702
7703*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
7704
7705*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
7706
7707The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
7708in greater detail.
7709\f
7710* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
7711
7712** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
7713second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
7714asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
7715exists.
7716
7717** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
7718as well as lists.
7719
7720** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
7721of a given keymap.
7722
7723** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
7724given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
7725keymap or nil.
7726
7727** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
7728an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
7729name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
7730menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
7731equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
7732alias.
7733\f
7734* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
7735
7736** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
7737
7738Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
7739This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
7740was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
7741far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
7742pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
7743
7744For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
7745you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
7746`http://www.vtw.org/'.
7747
7748** A note about C mode indentation customization.
7749
7750The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
7751do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
7752It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
7753much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
7754chapter of the manual for details.
7755
7756However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
7757customization variables take effect.
7758
7759** Marking with the mouse.
7760
7761When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
7762highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
7763using M-x transient-mark-mode.
7764
7765** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
7766
7767*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
7768
7769*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
7770to work on NT only and not on 95.)
7771
7772*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
7773in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
7774you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
7775application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
7776applications, these problems are significant.
7777
7778If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
7779likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
7780However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
7781will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
7782other DOS application as a subprocess.
7783
7784Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
7785You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
7786
7787If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
7788subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
7789have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
7790Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
7791separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
7792Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
7793
7794** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
7795
7796This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
7797which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
7798minibuffer contains.
7799
7800** `title' frame parameter and resource.
7801
7802The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
7803It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
7804It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
7805affects just the displayed title of the frame.
7806
7807The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
7808it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
7809and also serves as the default for the displayed title
7810when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
7811
7812** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
7813enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
7814
7815** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
7816F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
7817Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
7818
7819If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
7820menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
7821something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
7822the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
7823
7824 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
7825
7826** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
7827to replace the characters it "deletes".
7828
7829** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
7830
7831** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
7832a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
7833select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
7834It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
7835immediately after the selected one.
7836
7837This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
7838made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
7839
7840** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
7841
7842Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
7843directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
7844If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
7845Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
7846recover-session.
7847
7848You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
7849auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
7850will not work.
7851
7852Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
7853normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
7854this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
7855bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
7856now that the bug is fixed.
7857
7858** Changes to Version Control (VC)
7859
7860There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
7861when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
7862Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
7863which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
7864
7865If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
7866telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
7867VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
7868the link is visited and a warning displayed.
7869
7870** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
7871Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
7872is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
7873
7874There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
7875Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
7876enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
7877The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
7878remain normal.
7879
7880** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
7881header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
7882
7883Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
7884known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
7885offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
7886Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
7887
7888Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
7889of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
7890a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
7891name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
7892documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
7893`mail-directory-stream'.)
7894
7895** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
7896skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
7897characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
7898with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
7899
7900Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
7901- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
7902wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
7903
7904The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
7905less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
7906headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
7907Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
7908Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
7909fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
7910to a limitation in font-lock).
7911
7912External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
7913
7914** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
7915buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
7916buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
7917this example:
7918
7919 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
7920 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
7921
7922** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7923
7924*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
7925
7926*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
7927
7928*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
7929
7930*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
7931entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
7932will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
7933isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
7934(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
7935The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
7936
7937*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
7938does the same job.
7939
7940*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
7941"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
7942
7943*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
7944text.
7945
7946** Font Lock mode
7947
7948*** Global Font Lock mode
7949
7950Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
7951new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
7952font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
7953turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
7954on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
7955
7956For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
7957
7958 (global-font-lock-mode t)
7959
7960in your ~/.emacs.
7961
7962*** Local Refontification
7963
7964In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
7965However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
7966those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
7967command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
7968
7969In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
7970(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
7971current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
7972above and below point.
7973
7974With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
7975
7976** Follow mode
7977
7978Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
7979buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
7980side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
7981they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
7982split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
7983follow-mode.
7984
7985M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
7986
7987To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
7988command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
7989
7990** hide-show changes.
7991
7992The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
7993to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
7994normal hooks.
7995
7996** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
7997The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
7998
7999** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8000recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8001those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8002
8003** MSDOS Changes
8004
8005*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8006Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8007
8008*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8009and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8010
8011*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8012
8013*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8014pressing both mouse buttons.
8015
8016*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8017restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
79214ddf 8018are:
a933dad1
DL
8019
8020**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8021now works.
8022
8023**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8024
8025**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8026implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8027
8028**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8029
8030**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8031
8032**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8033
8034**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8035
8036**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8037\f
8038* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8039
8040** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8041tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8042remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8043this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8044behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8045
8046** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8047
8048The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8049not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8050need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8051be different.
8052
8053It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8054than `system-type'.
8055
8056See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8057
8058** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8059now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8060
8061** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8062that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8063
8064** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8065no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8066reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8067
8068The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8069to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8070like this:
8071
8072 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8073
8074SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8075It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8076becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8077
8078REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8079seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8080means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8081
8082*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8083up if too much time passes.
8084
8085 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8086
8087This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8088If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8089of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8090form in BODY.
8091
8092*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8093a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8094call looks like this:
8095
8096 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8097
8098SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8099runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8100timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8101ARGS.
8102
8103Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8104command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8105command.
8106
8107REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8108time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8109does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8110each time Emacs becomes idle.
8111
8112If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8113idle for SECS seconds.
8114
8115*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8116all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8117programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8118instead.
8119
8120*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8121there is no answer within a certain time.
8122
8123 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8124
8125asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8126within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8127Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8128
8129** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8130arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8131meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8132arguments in between are ignored.
8133
8134This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8135the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8136
8137** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8138/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8139/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8140site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8141version.
8142
8143It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8144version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8145for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8146has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8147and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8148problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8149
8150** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8151.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8152systems with limited file name syntax.
8153
8154Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8155convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8156for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8157completions.el:
8158
8159(defvar save-completions-file-name
8160 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8161 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8162
8163This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8164depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8165convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8166Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8167MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8168
8169** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8170rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8171minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8172
8173** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8174marker from its buffer position.
8175
8176** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8177Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8178The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8179
8180** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8181that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8182condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8183of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8184matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8185regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8186
8187This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8188errors that happen often during editing.
8189
8190** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8191into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8192puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8193
8194** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8195now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8196
8197** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8198a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8199name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8200to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8201and not get-buffer-window.
8202
8203** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8204calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8205being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8206
8207If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8208buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8209property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8210non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8211are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8212property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8213over and over for the same text.
8214
8215** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8216
8217*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8218in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8219
8220;; @(#) HEADER: text
8221;; $HEADER: text $
8222
8223in addition to the normal
8224
8225;; HEADER: text
8226
8227*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8228checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8229lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8230\f
8231* For older news, see the file ONEWS.
8232
8233----------------------------------------------------------------------
8234Copyright information:
8235
404fa7d6 8236Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8237
8238 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8239 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8240 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8241 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8242
8243 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8244 of this document, or of portions of it,
8245 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8246 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8247\f
8248Local variables:
8249mode: outline
8250paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8251end: